3900 Series Base StationV100R009C00 Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 Date 2014-03-26 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: http://www.huawei.com Email:
[email protected] Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) About This Document About This Document Overview This document describes the principles for configuring hardware in 3900 series base stations. Based on specific configuration requirements in this document, the quantities of components to be configured in a base station can be calculated and planned. The exteriors of components and cables in this document are for reference only. The actual exteriors may be different. Product Version Product Name Product Version BTS3900 V100R008C00 and later. The mapping base station versions are: BTS3900A GBTS: V100R015C00 and later, V300R015C00 and later BTS3900L eGBTS: V100R015C00 and later BTS3900AL NodeB: V200R015C00 and later DBS3900 eNodeB: V100R006C00 and later BTS3900C Intended Audience This document is intended for: l Technical support engineers l System engineers Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global).................................................1 2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).............................4 3 Overview.........................................................................................................................................6 4 Version Difference........................................................................................................................9 4.1 Cabinet Configurations.................................................................................................................................................10 4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration............................................................................................................................................10 4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration..........................................................................................................................................14 4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration..........................................................................................................................................22 4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration.......................................................................................................................................25 4.1.5 DBS3900 Configurations..........................................................................................................................................28 4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration..........................................................................................................................................29 4.1.7 Cabinet Upgrade Configuration.................................................................................................................................30 4.2 BBU Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................37 4.2.1 BBU Case Configuration...........................................................................................................................................38 4.2.2 BBU Board Configuration.........................................................................................................................................40 4.2.3 CPRI Networking Configurations.............................................................................................................................59 4.3 RF Module Configuration............................................................................................................................................60 1 RF Module Configurations.................................................................................................... 0 2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)........................................................................ 0 3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)...................................................................... 0 4 RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)........................................................................ 0 5 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)...................................................................... 0 6 RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)...................................................................... 0 7 RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz)...................................................................... 0 8 RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS)............................................................................... 0 9 RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz)...................................................................... 0 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii ....168 4..........................4....165 4....................................2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles.....................................................................................................................................................4..............................................................................4..........166 4.....................................................................101 4................................................................... Ltd...165 4................................................3 RET Module Configurations............4 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration......................... 0 4...................................................2 Capacity Expansion Principles.........5......................................1 AAU Configuration.....................................................3.174 4...............................2 Power Module......................102 4.......................................................................................... 0 12 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)...............1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station.. iv ........5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion.................................234 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Contents 10 RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz)...........3 Basic pRRU Configurations.......................3.1 Typical Configurations.........................74 4......................173 4.......................................84 4................................3.........................................................................................................4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station.....................................................................................3............................................................5.................................................5 Hardware License Configuration...............................................................................................................................................3.... 0 11 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)....................................................................................................................................................150 4................................................................ 1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station.3 CPRI Networking Configurations.4. this issue includes the following new topics: l 4.4. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 06 (2014-03-26) This is the sixth official release. Ltd. 05 (2014-02-28) This is the fifth official release. Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08). this issue does not exclude any topics. l Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P Scenarios.. this issue includes the following changes. Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08).3 Basic pRRU Configurations. 04 (2014-01-20) This is the fourth official release. l 4.2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles. Compared with Issue 05 (2014-02-28). l GU Co-BBP. this issue includes the following new topics: l AAU3902 Configuration. Compared with Issue 04 (2014-01-20).4.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 1 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) This chapter describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global). l 4. l 4. Compared with Issue 04 (2014-01-20). 1 . the content is adjusted in this issue.2. this issue includes the following changes.1 Cabinet Configurations and its child topics Added description of the BBU3910 to the configuration list. Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Compared with Issue 02 (2013-08-01). this issue does not include any new information. this issue does not exclude any topics.2 BBU Board Configuration and its child topics Added models.D)+IMB06 configuration. Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20). Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08).D)+IMB06 configuration. 03 (2013-11-08) This is the third commercial release. UMTS BBU Board Configurations Added configuration principles for the UBBP. Ltd. 2 . this issue does not include any new information or exclude any information. this issue includes the following changes: Topic Change Description 4. Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Topic Change Description 4. BTS3900L Configuration List Added the BTS3900L (Ver.. 02 (2013-08-01) This is the second commercial release.2. this issue includes the following changes: Topic Change Description BTS3900 Configuration List Added the BTS3900 (Ver. Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26). License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations Added the configuration of the multimode coBBP license. 01 (2013-06-26) This is the first commercial release. Draft A (20..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Topic Change Description 4.3 RF Module Configuration and its child topics Added the description of the AAU.13) This is a draft.05. Ltd.1 Cabinet Configurations and its child topics Added the cabinet configuration list. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3 . 4. UMTS. and RRU3268/RRU3260. capacity expansion. which mainly comprises the baseband unit (BBU) and RF modules. In co-MPT scenarios. and LTE can share the BBU. and two BBUs support triple modes. A uniform design is applied to various product forms and different installation scenarios. RRU3824/RRU3826/RRU3838/ RRU3832/RRU3839. a base station can work in a single mode or any two or all triple modes among GSM. Introduction to 3900 Series Base Stations The 3900 series base stations. In addition. – RF modules working in different frequency bands can also be used together. UMTS and LTE by using different software configurations to meet operators' requirements. – Blade RRUs include RRU3936/RRU3938/RRU3939. one BBU supports triple modes. one BBU supports two modes. – High-power RFUs are as follows: MRFUd/MRFUe/WRFUd/WRFUe/CRFUd used together with the BTS3900 (Ver. – With the SDR technology. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. use the state-of-the-art multimode technology. Ltd. – High-power RRUs are as follows: RRU3829/RRU3929/RRU3942/RRU3841/ RRU3961/RRU3832/RRU3839/RRU3939 that are used together with the DCDU-11B/ DCDU-12B. the 2100 MHz AAU3910 and AWS AAU3910 are also high-power RF modules.D) cabinet. 4 . Boards working in different modes can be configured in a BBU so that any two or three among GSM. UMTS and LTE.2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global) 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global) This document describes the configuration principles for single. l The BBU supports multimode applications. Therefore.C/Ver. RF modules support any two or all triple modes among GSM. l RRUs and RFUs support multimode and multi-band applications. In separate-MPT scenarios. RF modules of different modes can be deployed at one base station.and multi-mode 3900 series base stations. This significantly reduces operators' network construction and operating costs in site acquisition. and environmental protection.The 3900 series base stations provide various solutions for evolution from GSM to UMTS and then to LTE.. All other RRUs are low-power RRUs. GSM [UMTS*LTE] can be shortened to G[U*L].3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global) NOTE The BBU in this document includes the BBU3900 and BBU3910. GSM&UMTS+LTE indicates a separate-MPT GSM/ UMTS/LTE triple-mode base station. Ltd. + It is used between different modes for the two BBUs in a separate-MPT base station.For example. GSM*UMTS indicates a co-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station.For example. GSM&UMTS indicates a separate-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station. For example. UMPT_GUL is a UMPT working in GUL mode and UBBP_UL is a UBBP working in UL mode. Table 2-1 Symbol meanings Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Symbol Description & It is used between different modes in a separate-MPT base station. which can be shortened to G*U. 5 . Description The following table describes the meanings of some symbols and phrases in the document. GU SDR GSM and UMTS share the same RF modules. * It is used between different modes in a co-MPT base station. GL SDR GSM and LTE share the same RF modules. UL SDR UMTS and LTE share the same RF modules. For example. which can be shortened to GU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which can be shortened to GU+L.. For example. _ The mode following the underscore next to UMPT or UBBP is the actual mode in which the UMPT or UBBP is working. [] the modes contained in [] share the same main control board. SRAN8. RAN16.1.1.0. LBBPd3.0.0 are GBSS15.8 A) working in the LTE only mode.0 includes the following changes: l Added the following new hardware: UBRIb. Ltd. and BTS3900AL (Ver.D).0 The single-mode versions for SRAN8. SRAN8. 2100 MHz. l Added configurations for the Lampsite solution. l Added the ODM and OFD. l Added the GULT quadruple mode.1 includes the following changes: l Added the following RF modules: EGSM. l Added the AAU3902 (2100 MHz). UMPTb1. BTS3900L (Ver. SRAN8. IMB03.0. and eRAN6.C)).D). and UTRPa.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN9.D). 2600 MHz.D). APM30H (Ver. Compared with SRAN8.0. RAN15. l Added the UBBP and BBU3910.1 The single-mode versions for SRAN8.1. TMC11H (Ver. SRAN9.0. and RRU3938 (1800 MHz) l Added the RRU3268 800 MHz for eRAN6. l Added the AAU3910. l Added the AAU3902 (1.0.. BTS3900A (Ver. and eRAN6.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 3 Overview 3 Overview SRAN9.C) (applies to DBS3900 and BTS3900C (Ver.1. l Added the Cloud BB solution. or AWS.0.A). . which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz.0. Compared with SRAN7.8 A AAU3902 in GL mode.D). and eRAN7.1 are GBSS15. l Added the multimode baseband license.0. SRAN8.0 are GBSS16. RAN15. 6 . OMB (Ver. PGSM. Compared with SRAN8. A BBU3910 can be installed in the following cabinets: BTS3900 (Ver. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0 includes the following changes: l Added the 1. l Added the AAU3910. l Added the following RF modules: RRU3260 (2600 MHz).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 3 Overview l Added the RRU3926 in GL mode. GSM is contained in brackets because a GTMU board is not configured in the BBU which is only used by LTE or UMTS.0. eRAN2. Compared with eRAN2. UCIU (interconnection board).0 The single-mode versions for SRAN7.2 is an LTE only version. BB Receive Channel License. l Added the following LTE hardware licenses: Resource Block License.0. BB Transmit Channel. UTRPa.0.2 eRAN2. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0 are GBSS14. RRU3268 (2600 MHz). RRU3841 (AWS). l l The BTS3900 (Ver. SRAN7. Compared with SRAN6. and RRU3936 (850 MHz and 1900 MHz). RAN14. or AWS in SRAN8.1. CRFUd (AWS). WBBPf (UMTS baseband processing board). LRFUe (2600 MHz).D) AC cabinet can be stacked on an IMS06 which houses transmission equipment or 92 Ah storage batteries. and RF Receive Channel. l Added configurations for GUL modes.2: UL 2x4 MU-MIMO and DL 4x4 MIMO. 2100 MHz. LTE (GSM) or UMTS (GSM) indicates that LTE or UMTS uses one BBU and shares SDR RF modules with GSM in the other BBU. the SDR RF modules must be connected across BBUs in a star topology to support GL or GU.2 includes the following changes: l Added the following features in eRAN2. l Added the configuration scenarios where SDR RF modules are connected by means of BBU interconnection. UMPTa2 (LTE main control board). l Added UMTS NodeB Signaling Capacity License. l Added the RRU3942 of 1900 MHz in UL mode. RRU3939 (1800 MHz). Ltd. eRAN2. RRU3942 (850 MHz). l Specified specifications of HSPA user number supported by a WBBP. LBBPd (LTE baseband processing board). BBU interconnection port. such as GSM&UMTS+LTE (GSM). l Added the RRU3808 of AWS working in UL mode. Therefore.0. GSM&UMTS+UMTS<E (GSM).. GSM<E +UMTS (GSM). l Added configurations for GUL triple-mode co-transmission l Added configurations for GUL triple-mode common clock. 2600 MHz. 7 .0 includes the following changes: l Added the following hardware: the UTRPc (transmission extension board). GSM&UMTS+UMTS<E. UMPTa1 (UMTS main control board). SRAN7. l Added the GU/GL/UL/GUL co-MPT configurations. MRFUe (E900M). NOTE In triple-mode configurations. RF Transmit Channel. which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz. and eRAN3.0. and UMPTb1 (only for UMTS). l Added dual-carrier configurations. and Cell Outage Detection and Compensation. RAN13. Compared with SRAN5. Frequency Domain Equalization (FDE).0. The new cabinet supports the GUL triple modes. enhanced MRFUd. RRU3828 of 2100 MHz. l Added the GSM high power 80 W license. l Added the BTS3900(AC) Ver. Traffic-based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier in Multi-carrier. WRFUe of 2100 MHz.0 features: E-DPCCH Boosting.1. Intelligent Power Management. SRAN 5.0 includes the following changes: l Added the following hardware: RF modules of Band 13 (700 MHz). RRU3806 of 2100 MHz (80 W). RRU3942 of 1900 MHz.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation between GSM and UMTS Mode. RRU3240 of 2600 MHz. l Added the GSM high power 60 W license. RRU3824 of 2100 MHz.0 are GBSS12. and Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier. l Added the following RAN12.D cabinets for 220 V AC scenarios. RRU3928 of 1800 MHz. RRU3832 of AWS. enhanced WRFU of 2100 MHz (80 W). and eRAN2. and MRFUe.0. 8 . RRU3929 of P900M. Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell.0 features: Interference Cancellation (IC). and RRU3939 of 1800 MHz. including the GSM&UMTS+LTE and GSM<E+UMTS modes.D and BTS3900L(AC) Ver. RRU3938 of EGSM/ PGSM/1800 MHz. RF modules of Band 20 (800 MHz). LRFUe of 800 MHz. WRFUd. l Added a new cabinet. DL 64QAM+MIMO. SRAN6. MRFUd of P900M/E900M. RRU3808 of AWS. Anti-interference Scheduling for HSUPA. RRU3929 of 1800 MHz. LoCation Services (LCS).0.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN6. MRFU V2 of Band 5 (850 MHz).0 dual-mode features: Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing and Bandwidth Sharing of MBTS in Multi-mode Co-Transmission.1 features: TTI Bundling. and RRU3221 of 2600 MHz. RRU3936 of 900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM.0 dual-mode features: GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing and 2. Multi-carrier Switch off Based on QoS. Compared with SRAN3. Dualthreshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation. UL L2 Enhanced. NodeB Internal Firewall. UTRPb4 (GSM transmission board). RAN12. RRU3832 of 2100 MHz.0 includes the following changes: l Added the following hardware: WBBPd (UMTS baseband board). which is required by the MRFUd. RRU3826 of 2100 MHz. DC-HSDPA.0.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 3 Overview SRAN6. RRU3926 of 900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM. SRAN5.0 are GBSS13. UL 16QAM. LRFUe. RRU3838 of 2100 MHz. Ltd.. CQI Adjustment. WRFUa of 2100 MHz (100 W).0. and eRAN2. l Added the following SRAN6. WRFUd of 2100 MHz. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0. l Added the maximum configuration of six UMTS baseband processing boards. and MIMO prime. and RRU3829 of 2100 MHz. l Added the following SRAN5. RRU3839 of 2100 MHz. l Added the following eRAN2. MRFUd of Band 2 (1800 MHz).0. DC-HSDPA+MIMO. RRU3929 of E900M. RRU3928 of 900 MHz. l Added the following RAN13.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN5. 2 BBU Configuration 4.1 Cabinet Configurations 4.5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9 . Ltd.3 RF Module Configuration 4.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference 4 Version Difference About This Chapter This chapter describes the principles for configuringDBS3900BTS3900C..4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station 4. 4. and RF modules. Its minimum configuration consists of a cabinet and the minimum configuration of baseband processing boards.. Ltd.1. BBU. A distributed base station consists of baseband processing boards and RF modules. RF modules. A macro base station consists of the cabinet. a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported. 10 . and RF modules.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference 4. - l If RFUs and RRUs are configured. 4. and RF modules. and transmission interface boards support smooth capacity expansion by adding related boards or licenses.or dualmode base station 2 1 l If only RFUs are configured.1 Cabinet Configurations 3900 series base stations adopt a module design. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BBUs. main control and transmission boards. BTS3900 configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900 configuration principles. and RF modules at a BTS3900 site.1 BTS3900 Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets. Table 4-1 BTS3900 configuration principles Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station Maximum Number of Cabinets Maximum Number of BBUs Maximum Number of RF Modules Description Single. main control and transmission boards. Its minimum configuration consists of the minimum configuration of baseband processing boards. The baseband processing boards. a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported. see2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).B or Ver. The DCDU supplying power to RRUs can be installed in the BTS3900 cabinet. and 3 low-power RRUs. 11 . a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.C cabinet supports a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs.D cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs. The DCDU supplying power to RRUs must be installed on a wall outside the cabinet.. If RFUs and RRUs are configured: l A Ver. Ltd. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station Maximum Number of Cabinets Maximum Number of BBUs Maximum Number of RF Modules Description Separate-MPT triple-mode base station 2 2 If only RFUs are configured. 6 high-power RRUs. For high-power RRUs. l A site that uses Ver. B or Ver. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.C AC cabinet can house a maximum of one BBU.D cabinet must be used.. WRFUd. or MRFUe is configured.C or Ver.B) cabinet can neither be configured as a separate-MPT triple-mode base station nor be configured with RFUs and RRUs together. NOTE l A single Ver.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station Maximum Number of Cabinets Maximum Number of BBUs Maximum Number of RF Modules Description Co-MPT triplemode base station 2 1 If only RFUs are configured. A single Ver. - If RFUs and RRUs are configured.C.D AC cabinet can be configured with a maximum of 6 RFUs and 9 RRUs. BTS3900 Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900 cabinets and their internal devices.C or Ver. l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power. Table 4-2 Configuration list Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Description Configuration Principle WD2B48RACK00 BTS3900 Cabinet (DC -48V) WD2B48RACK03 BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.C) AC cabinet and +24 V DC BTS3900 (Ver. a Ver. a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported. WRFUe. The Ver.D cabinet can house a maximum of two BBUs.B) or (Ver. l If the MRFUd. a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported. a Ver. l The BTS3900 (Ver. which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to scenarios with AC backup power. 12 . DC -48V) -48 V DC BTS3900 indoor macro cabinet.D cabinet must be used. 13 .D. The IMS06 can house a 5 U AC power device. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) WD2M048BBU01 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units. BBUs. WD2M3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units.C. consisting of a BTS3900 cabinet and an IMS06 stacked together. Ltd. WD2PACRACK00 BTS3900 Cabinet (AC 220V/110V) WD2BACRACK01 BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver. the site can be configured with one AC cabinet and one DC cabinet.D. containing one UPEUd and FANd. One piece of DC cabinet can be configured in 220 V AC scenarios without backup power when the site needs to be configured with 7 to 11 RFUs. and RFUs WD2P220CAB00 BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver. which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC scenarios with backup power and 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power. containing one UPEUc. one piece is configured by default. When two cabinets need to be configured. It is supported from SRAN6. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power. DC -48V) -48 V DC BTS3900 indoor macro base station.0 onwards. 220VAC) 220 V AC indoor macro cabinet.. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Configuration Principle WD2P048CAB10 BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver. In 220 V AC scenarios without backup power. AC 220V/110V) 220 V AC or 110 V AC indoor macro cabinet for housing the power module. Ltd.2 BTS3900A Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets. a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference NOTE When the BTS3900 is stacked on two IMS06s. see2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 6 highpower RRUs.B or Ver. 2 1 l If RFUs and RRUs need to be configured: A BTS3900A site that uses Ver. an EPU05A and a group of battaries (92 Ah) or an EPU05A and two transmission devices can be installed.C cabinets supports a maximum of 6 RFUs and 6 RRUs. 14 .D cabinets support a maximum of 6 RFUs. BBUs. and 3 low-power RRUs.C cabinets supports a maximum of two groups of APM30H +RFC.B or Ver. and RF modules at a BTS3900A site. BTS3900A configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900A configuration principles.or dual-mode base station l A BTS3900A site can uses Ver. A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.1. SeparateMPT triplemode base station Co-MPT triple-mode base station Issue 06 (2014-03-26) l A BTS3900A site that uses Ver. 4. Table 4-3 BTS3900A configuration principles Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station Maximum Number of Cabinets Maxim um Numbe r of BBUs Maximum Number of RF Modules Remarks Single. 1 l If only RFUs need to be configured.D cabinets supports a maximum of one APM30H and two RFCs. For high-power RRUs. with a heat exchanger By default. Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with -48 V DC power 15 . AC 110V) By default.C or Ver. an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. AC 220V) WD2P022APM06 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.D cabinet must be used.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference NOTE l If the MRFUd.. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). a Ver. a Ver. Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 110 V AC power By default. AC 220V) WD2P022APM05 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30. WD2B048APM03 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30.D cabinet must be used. Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 220 V AC power. WRFUd. AC 220V) Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 220 V AC power WD2P022APM04 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W. The cabinet of the 05/06 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C. Ltd. l When RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W. an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.C or Ver. AC 220V) WD2P011APM03 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W. or MRFUe is configured. Table 4-4 Configuration list Model Description Configuration Principle WD2P022APM03 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30. LRFUe. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). -48V) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BTS3900A Configuration List The following table lists the BTS3900A cabinets and their internal devices. WRFUe. 16 . WD2P022CAB00 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver. In 220 V AC scenarios. containing one UPEUd and FANd. DC -48V) WD2B226RFU03 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet WD2B226RFU04 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet WD2B116RFU03 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Outdoor macro cabinet housing RFUs for a BTS3900A site supplied with 110 V AC power WD2M048BBU01 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units. which support triple modes. DC -48V) WD2B048APM06 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power. the customer needs to provide independent power supply for the heating film. used for a BTS3900A site supplied with -48 V DC power For a cabinet with heating film. By default. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC. AC 220V) 220 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC.C. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power. DC -48V) WD2B048APM07 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30.. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Configuration Principle WD2B048APM04 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30. WD2M3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. BTS3900A cabinet. containing one UPEUc. used for housing RFUs In a newly deployed site. a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. When Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). Outdoor cabinet (APM30) with heating film. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. AC 110V) 110 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation.. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC. It contains an APM30 and an RFC.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Configuration Principle WD2P022CAB01 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. By default. AC 220V) the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W. The cabinet of the 01 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C. In 110 V AC scenarios. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W. WD2P048CAB00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver. WD2P011CAB00 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C. -48 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. 17 . Ltd. DC -48V) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. which support triple modes. In a newly deployed site.C. This item is configured when an RFU cabinet is required. In a newly deployed site. 18 . which support triple modes. The cabinet of the 01 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C. a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. WD2B226RFU05 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet (Ver.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Configuration Principle WD2P048CAB01 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver. In -48 V DC scenarios. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC. Ltd. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required.C) Outdoor macro cabinet housing RFUs for a BTS3900A site When high-power RFUs are used. this item must be configured. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required.. DC -48V) In a newly deployed site.C. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When high-power RFUs are used. 19 . which support triple modes. In a newly deployed site. Ltd. This package contains an APM30 and an RFC.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Configuration Principle WD2P022CAB21 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver. By default. 220V AC) Outdoor cabinets for stacked installation at a BTS3900A site supplied with 220V DC power. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W. an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC. a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this item must be configured.. In 220 V AC scenarios.D. In 110 V AC scenarios. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W. Ltd. 220V AC) Outdoor cabinets for stacked installation at a BTS3900A site supplied with 110V DC power. In a newly deployed site. 20 . an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.. When high-power RFUs are used. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). This package contains an APM30 and an RFC.D. this item must be configured. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which support triple modes.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Configuration Principle WD2P022CAB22 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver. By default. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC. a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W. In 110 V AC scenarios. When high-power RFUs are used. By default. an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.D. 21 . When high-power RFUs are used.D. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. In a newly deployed site. In -48 V DC scenarios. this item must be configured.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Configuration Principle WD2P011CAB23 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver. This package contains an APM30 and an RFC. Ltd. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. this item must be configured. -48V DC) Outdoor cabinets for stacked installation at a BTS3900A site supplied with -48 V DC power. which support triple modes. In a newly deployed site. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required.. This package contains an APM30 and an RFC. which support triple modes. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC. a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC. 110V AC) Outdoor cabinets for stacked installation at a BTS3900A site supplied with 110V DC power. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). WD2P048CAB24 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver. 22 . In a newly deployed site. WD2B226RFU11 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet (Ver. Ltd. BBUs.D. In a newly deployed site. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In -48 V DC scenarios.. -48V DC) Outdoor macro cabinet housing RFUs for a BTS3900A site When high-power RFUs are used. -48V DC) When high-power RFUs are used. this item must be configured. this item must be configured. BTS3900L configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900L configuration principles.3 BTS3900L Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets. 4. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC.1. This item is configured when an RFU cabinet is required.D. a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. and RF modules at a BTS3900L site. which support triple modes.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Configuration Principle WD2P048CAB25 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-5 BTS3900L configuration principles Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station Maximum Number of Cabinets Maximu m Number of BBUs Maximum Number of RF Modules Description Single. and 3 low-power RRUs. Co-MPT triple-mode base station 1 1 l If only RFUs are configured. l If RFUs and RRUs need to be configured: A BTS3900L site that uses Ver. a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported. a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported. Separate-MPT triple-mode base station 1 2 l If only RFUs are configured. For high-power RRUs.B or Ver. a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported. 6 highpower RRUs.C cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs. - l If RFUs and RRUs are configured. a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported. - l If RFUs and RRUs are configured.. A BTS3900L site that uses Ver. a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.or dual-mode base station 1 1 l If only RFUs are configured. Ltd.D cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs. 23 . see2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global). BBUs. a Ver. l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power.D..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference NOTE l If the MRFUd.C. WD2B48RACK04 BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver. WD2M048BBU01 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units.D) indoor macro cabinet.B) indoor macro cabinet.C or Ver. WRFUe. WD2P220CAB01 BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver. It is supported from SRAN6.D cabinet must be used. which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power. which consists of a BTS3900L cabinet stacked on an IMS06. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power. and RFUs.0 onwards. WRFUd. WD2P048CABL1 BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.D. 220VAC) 220 V AC BTS3900L (Ver. Ltd. DC -48V) -48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver. which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC scenarios with backup power and 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power. or MRFUe is configured.C) indoor macro cabinet. a Ver.C or Ver.D) indoor macro base station. BTS3900L Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900L cabinets and their internal devices. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power. 24 . Table 4-6 Configuration list Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Counter Description Function WD2B48RACK01 BTS3900L Cabinet (DC -48V) -48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.D cabinet must be used. DC -48V) -48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver. containing one UPEUc. It houses the EPU05A. see2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global). a maximum of 9 RFUs and 12 RRUs are supported. a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported. 25 . If RFUs and RRUs are configured. 2 If only RFUs are configured. containing one UPEUd and FANd.or dual-mode base station A maximu m of two BTS3900 AL cabinets (1 BTS3900 AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900 AL DC cabinet) 1 If only RFUs are configured. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power. For high-power RRUs. and RF modules at a BTS3900AL site. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BTS3900AL configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900AL configuration principles.4 BTS3900AL Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets. BBUs. a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported. SeparateMPT triplemode base station If RFUs and RRUs are configured.1. a maximum of 9 RFUs and 9 RRUs are supported. Table 4-7 BTS3900AL configuration principles Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station Maximu m Number of Cabinet s Maxim um Numbe r of BBUs Maximum Number of RF Modules Description Single.. 4.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Counter Description Function WD2M3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units. Ltd. containing one UPEUc. Table 4-8 Configuration list Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Counter Description Function WD2P048BBU00 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units. the two cabinets must be installed side by side with the BTS3900AL DC cabinet on the right. BTS3900AL Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900AL cabinets and their internal devices. NOTE If a site is configured with two BTS3900AL cabinets.. WD2P3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station 4 Version Difference Maximu m Number of Cabinet s Co-MPT triple-mode base station Maxim um Numbe r of BBUs Maximum Number of RF Modules 1 If only RFUs are configured. a maximum of 9 RFUs and 9 RRUs are supported. containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power. Description If RFUs and RRUs are configured. 26 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported. a site supports a maximum of one AC outdoor macro cabinet and one DC outdoor macro cabinet. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 2 BBUs. Ltd. WD5P0ACCAB01 BTS3900AL Cabinet (AC 220V/110V) BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V outdoor cabinet. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 2 BBUs. an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. used in cold areas In 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios. an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W. By default. 27 .. a site supports a maximum of one AC outdoor macro cabinet and one DC outdoor macro cabinet. By default. this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Counter Description Function WD5P0ACCAB00 BTS3900AL Cabinet (AC 220V/110V) BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V outdoor cabinet In 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios. OMB Configurations The following table lists the cabinets used by the OMB and their components. one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet or two BTS3900AL DC cabinets can be configured to support a maximum of 18 RFUs. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs. WD5P0DCCAB01 BTS3900AL Cabinet (DC -48V) BTS3900AL -48 V DC outdoor cabinet. The DC cabinet is powered by the AC cabinet. Ltd. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs. The DC cabinet is powered by the AC cabinet.1.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Counter Description Function WD5P0DCCAB00 BTS3900AL Cabinet (DC -48V) BTS3900AL -48 V DC outdoor cabinet When a site is configured with more than 9 RFUs. 28 . It is used for the DBS3900 and cannot be configured with an APM30 series power cabinet.5 DBS3900 Configurations The OMB cabinet is an outdoor power cabinet and provides no backup power. used in cold areas When a site is configured with more than 9 RFUs. one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet or two BTS3900AL DC cabinets can be configured to support a maximum of 18 RFUs.. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. C.1. Each site can be configured with a maximum of one cabinet.C) cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power. WD2MR4850G00 PSU Module (AC/DC) This is a power supply module. consisting of an OMB (Ver. and RF modules at a BTS3900C site.C) AC cabinet uses four to six DC RRUs. One PSU is configured when the OMB (Ver.C) and an RRU subrack 1 Only one RRU can be configured. BBUs.C. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BTS3900C Configuration Principles The following table lists the BTS3900C configuration principles. Table 4-10 BTS3900C configuration principles Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Cabinet Configuration Maximum Number of BBUs RF Module Configuratio n Remarks BTS3900C (Ver. 220/110 V AC) This is an OMB (Ver. Each site can be configured with a maximum of one cabinet. 4. Ltd. 29 . Each cabinet supports a maximum of six RRUs and one BBU.C) cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power. -48 V DC) This is an OMB (Ver.6 BTS3900C Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets. QWMB0OMBDC00 OMB Cabinet (Ver.. Each cabinet supports a maximum of six RRUs and one BBU.or multimode base station.C). It applies to a single.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-9 Configuration list External Model Description Function QWMB0OMBAC00 OMB Cabinet (Ver. C. Table 4-11 Configuration list Model Description Function QWMB0OMBAC00 OMB Cabinet (Ver.C. WD2M3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units. power distribution. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.D cabinet. containing one UPEUc.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference BTS3900C Configuration List The following table lists the cabinets used by the BTS3900C and their internal devices.. and heat dissipation as a Ver. -48V DC) OMB (Ver. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.1. containing one UPEUd and FANd. 30 .D with components designed for a Ver.7 Cabinet Upgrade Configuration The cabinet upgrade solution aims to replace components in a cabinet whose version is earlier than Ver.D cabinet so that the restructured cabinet has the same capabilities of power supply. BTS3900 The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages.C) supplied with -48 V DC power WD2M048BBU01 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units. This solution facilitates the evolution to SingleRAN. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power. 4. 220/110V AC) OMB (Ver.C) supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power QWMB0OMBDC00 OMB Cabinet (Ver. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-12 BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2B00AD 4800 BTS3900 Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. such as the DCDU and fans.A to Ver..B to Ver.D. 2 l Optional. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. -48VDC) This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900 (Ver. BTS3900L The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios. l Optional. BTS3900 Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900 cabinet upgrade.B) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is to be upgraded.D. one package is configured for the cabinet. one package is configured for the cabinet.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios. 31 . l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900 cabinet upgrade.A) cabinet to a BTS3900 (Ver. -48VDC) This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900 (Ver. l When a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is to be upgraded.B) cabinet to a BTS3900 (Ver. such as the DCDU and fans. 2 WD2B00BD 4800 l When a BTS3900 (Ver. and one PMU. AC/ DC system. l When an APM30 (Ver..A 301) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios. For details about the configuration of battery cabinet upgrade packages. fans. extra PSUs must be quoted. 32 . 1 l Optional. BTS3900A The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900A cabinet upgrade packages.A) cabinet upgrade packages Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2B220A 2D00 APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.D.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site. one package is configured for the cabinet.A.B to Ver. l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900L cabinet upgrade.B) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is to be upgraded.1 to Ver. such as the cabinet door. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade. The battery cabinet for the original base station also needs to be upgraded. l When a BTS3900L (Ver. 220VAC. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-13 BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2B0LBD 4800 BTS3900L Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.D. such as the DCDU and fans. -48VDC) This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900L (Ver. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 4-14 BTS3900A (Ver. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. 2 l Optional.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver. two PSUs.B) cabinet to a BTS3900L (Ver. If more than two PSUs are required. one package is configured for the cabinet. see related APM30 configuration manuals. A 302) to an APM30 (Ver. extra PSUs must be quoted.D. 110VAC. -48VDC. one package is configured for the cabinet. l When an APM30 (Ver. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade.D. one package is configured for the cabinet. AC/ DC system.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2B110A 2D00 APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. If more than two PSUs are required. two PSUs.A. such as the cabinet door. 2 APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and one PMU.1 to Ver. AC/ DC system.A 301) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.2 to Ver. 33 . two PSUs. l Optional. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade.D. and one PMU. l Optional. one package is configured for the cabinet. APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. If more than two PSUs are required. TMC11H. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade.A 302) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. AC/ DC system.A 301) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. 220VAC. such as the cabinet door. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver. extra PSUs must be quoted. fans. 2 l Optional. 2 WD2BA48A 2D00 WD2B220A 2D02 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver. fans. and fans. l When an APM30 (Ver. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. such as the cabinet door.A. Ltd.A.1 to Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site..D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site. 34 .D.A) to an RFC (Ver. If more than two PSUs are required. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. such as the cabinet door. AC/ DC system. fans. l When an APM30 (Ver. APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A 302) to an APM30 (Ver. one package is configured for the cabinet. one package is configured for the cabinet.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site. 2 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A 302) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded.2 to Ver. TMC11H. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A. extra PSUs must be quoted. Ltd.A 302) to an APM30 (Ver.D. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade. -48VDC) This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site. AC/ DC system.A 302) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. l Optional.. l When an RFC (Ver. such as the cabinet door.D. one package is configured for the cabinet.A. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade.A) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade. two PSUs.A to Ver. 2 l Optional. -48VDC.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site. 110VAC. l Optional.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2B110A 2D02 APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. 2 WD2BA48A 2D02 WD2BR48A 2D00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference l When an APM30 (Ver.2 to Ver. such as the DCDU and fans. and one PMU. and fans. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. AC/ DC system. l Optional. and fans.D. and one PMU. 35 .D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site. If more than two PSUs are required. If more than two PSUs are required.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.B) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. AC/ DC system. fans. one package is configured for the cabinet. such as the cabinet door. Ltd. such as the cabinet door. l When an APM30 (Ver. APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. two PSUs. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade.B) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. and one PMU.D.D. AC/ DC system. 220VAC. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. one package is configured for the cabinet.B) to an APM30 (Ver.B to Ver. TMC11H.B) cabinet upgrade packages Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2B220B2 D00 APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B) to an APM30 (Ver. 2 l Optional.B to Ver. one package is configured for the cabinet. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. extra PSUs must be quoted. 110VAC. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade.B) to an APM30 (Ver. 2 APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. l When an APM30 (Ver. l Optional. -48VDC. 2 WD2B110B2 D00 WD2BN48B 2D00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) l When an APM30 (Ver. such as the cabinet door.B to Ver. fans.B) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-15 BTS3900A (Ver.. two PSUs. extra PSUs must be quoted. 36 . -48VDC) This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver. fans. 220VAC. Ltd. AC/ DC system. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade. one package is configured for the cabinet. such as the DCDU and fans.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site. l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded.C) to an APM30 (Ver.B) to an RFC (Ver. 2 l Optional.B to Ver. two PSUs. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade.C to Ver. one package is configured for the cabinet. If more than two PSUs are required. and one PMU. 2 l Optional.C) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. such as the cabinet door.D.D. l When an RFC (Ver. extra PSUs must be quoted. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.C) cabinet upgrade packages Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2B220C 2D00 APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2BR48B 2D00 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. Table 4-16 BTS3900A (Ver. 2 BBU Configuration This section describes the number of BBUs configured in various types of base stations. 110VAC. one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade. l When an APM30 (Ver. AC/ DC system. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade.C to Ver.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.C to Ver. fans. -48VDC. l Optional.C) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. AC/ DC system.C) to an RFC (Ver.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2B110C 2D00 APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site. such as the cabinet door. and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required. 37 . APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver. 2 WD2BC48 C2D00 WD2BR48 C2D00 l When an APM30 (Ver. and fans. and the slot assignment principles. the number of different types of boards in the BBU. extra PSUs must be quoted.. l Optional. -48VDC) This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver. l When an RFC (Ver.C) to an APM30 (Ver. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. such as the cabinet door. two PSUs.D.C) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. TMC11H. Ltd.C) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade. such as the DCDU and fans. 2 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site. 2 l Optional. one package is configured for the cabinet. BTS3900A) This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver. one package is configured for the cabinet.D.C) to an APM30 (Ver.D. 4.C to Ver. GL The two modes share one BBU. UL The two modes share one BBU. which is configured with a WMPT/UMPT_U and an LMPT/UMPT_T. The following table lists the principles for configuring BBU cases in single-. dual-. G*L The two modes share one BBU. which is configured with a UMPT in U*L (coMPT) mode. Table 4-17 BBU Case Configuration Principle Single/Dual/TripleMode Base Station Configured Mode BBU Case Configuration Principle Single-mode base station GSM One BBU is configured. which is configured with a GTMU/UMPT_G and a WMPT/UMPT_U. which is configured with a UMPT in G*L (coMPT) mode. GU The two modes share one BBU. LTE One BBU is configured.. 38 . which is configured with a GTMU/UMPT_G and an LMPT/UMPT_L. G*U The two modes share one BBU. which is configured with a UMPT in G*U (coMPT) mode. and triplemode base stations. UT The two modes share one BBU.1 BBU Case Configuration The BBU is a mandatory component in 3900 series base stations. U*L The two modes share one BBU. Dual-mode base station Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Different principles apply to the BBU configuration in different types of base stations. which is configured with a WMPT/UMPT_U and an LMPT/UMPT_L.2. UMTS One BBU is configured.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference 4. Ltd. One BBU is shared by GSM and LTE. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS. 39 .. and the other BBU is shared by UMTS and LTE. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS. and the other BBU is used by LTE. The two BBUs are interconnected. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS. One BBU is shared by GSM and LTE. GL+U(G) Two BBUs are configured. GL+U Two BBUs are configured. and the other BBU is used by UMTS. The UMTS and LTE modes share a UMPT. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The two BBUs are interconnected. and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU. G[U*L] Three modes share one BBU. GU+UL Two BBUs are configured. and the other BBU is used by UMTS.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Single/Dual/TripleMode Base Station Separate-MPT triple-mode base station Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Configured Mode BBU Case Configuration Principle L*T The two modes share one BBU. GU+UL(G) Two BBUs are configured. GU+L Two BBUs are configured. and the other BBU is shared by UMTS and LTE. which is configured with a UMPT in L*T (coMPT) mode. The two BBUs are interconnected. GU+L(G) Two BBUs are configured. and the other BBU is used by LTE. The UMTS and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT. G[U*T] Three modes share one BBU. G*U*T The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU. U*L*T The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU. G*L*T The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Single/Dual/TripleMode Base Station Co-MPT triple-mode base station Configured Mode BBU Case Configuration Principle G[L*T] Three modes share one BBU. GU+[L*T](G) Two BBUs are configured. 4. 40 . Ltd.2 BBU Board Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring various types of boards in the BBU. and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU. GSM BBU Board Configurations The following table lists the GSM BBU board configurations.. G*U*L The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS. The LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT. and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU. U*L*T Quadruple-mode base station with co-MPT G*U*L*T The four modes share one UMPT in one BBU.2. The LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. U[L*T] Three modes share one BBU. and the UMTS mode is supported by a WMPT/UMPT_U. and the other BBU is shared by LTE FDD and LTE TDD. . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description. l For transmission specifications. expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference NOTE For the board specifications. see CPRI Specifications. l Provi des six CPRI ports. 41 . and see the following sections: l For carrier specifications. Ltd. l For CPRI specifications. Table 4-18 GSM BBU board configurations Model Descrip tion Functio n Maxim um Quantit y Configuration Principle GM5D0 0GTMU 01 GSM Main Control and Transpor t Unit (4E1&1 electrica l FE&1op tical FE) GSM Transmi ssion & Timing & Manage ment Unit type b (GTMU b) 1 A GTMUb must be configured in the following base stations: l The base station is a GBTS l Separate-MPT multimode base station including a GBTS l Provi des four E1s. see Transmission Port Specifications. see Capacity Specifications. l Provi des one FE electr ical port. Ltd. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The following table lists the UMTS BBU board configurations. For baseband specifications.. expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900. see Baseband Specifications. see Transmission Port Specifications. UMTS BBU Board Configurations NOTE For the board specifications. and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications. see CPRI Specifications. see Signaling Specifications. 42 . l A UBRIb needs to be configured to provide CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT where co-MPT is applied. l RFUs and RRUs are configured.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descrip tion Functio n Maxim um Quantit y Configuration Principle GM5D0 0UBRI0 0 Universa l BaseBan d Radio Interface Board (6CPRI interface ) Universa l baseban d radio interface unit for GSM (UBRI) 1 The UBRI needs to be configured in the following scenarios: Provides six CPRI ports. l For transmission specifications. obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description. l For signaling specifications. which include RRUs or RFUs in GSM mode. l More than six CPRI ports are required by GSM. . 3. l Provides one FE optical port.0.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-19 Configurations of the UMTS main control board Model Description Function Maxim um Numbe r to Be Configu red in a Single BBU Configuration Principle QWMD00 WMPT00 WCDMA Main Control and Transport Unit (4E1&1Electric al FE&1Optical FE) WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) 1 One WMPT or UMPTa1 must be configured in a base station of which the supported modes include UMTS. instead for GU or UL. two main control boards in the same mode are configured in one BBU. Ltd. There is a need for UMTS-to-LTE evolution. IPSec as well as PKI is supported.0 or RAN14. l Provides one FE electrical port. UMTS is served by the leaf BBU. but the UMPTa1 and WMPT cannot be configured in the same BBU. l Provides four E1s/ T1s. The main control board can be configured in 1+1 backup mode for UMTS only. 2. 43 . The UMPTa1 is required when a newly deployed site meets any of the following conditions: 1. When 1+1 backup is used. 5. the UMPTa1 is recommended. The signaling processing capability exceeds 170 CNBAP/s. Since SRAN7. and BBU interconnection is implemented by connecting the UCIU and UMPT. This board can also be configured when co- Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. UMPTa1) Universal main processing and transmission unit type a1 (UMPTa1) 1 Configuration Principle transmission is applied and the GSM IPSec or GSM PKI function is enabled. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) QWMDWB BPD100 Baseband Processing Unit (6 Cell. CE: UL192/DL192) QWMDWB BPD300 Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. Ltd..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Function Maxim um Numbe r to Be Configu red in a Single BBU WD2D0UM PT100 Universal Main Processing and Transmission Board (4 E1s & 1 Electrical FE/ GE port & 1 Optical FE/GE port. and LTE to share one main control board. Since SRAN8. signaling processing capability. l Provides one CI port. and number of CPRI ports to be supported by the base station. l Provides four E1s/ T1s. l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. the UMPTa1 allows any two or all triple modes of GSM. UMTS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. number of uplink and downlink CEs.0. The number of WBBPs to be configured in a base station depends on the number of cells. CE:UL256/ DL256) WCDMA baseband processing board 6 l A WBBPdx provides six CPRI ports. 44 . CE:UL192/ DL256) QWMDWB BPF201 Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell. 45 . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If the WBBPf4 is used. WBBPf1. LTE BBU Board Configurations This section describes the configuration principles for LTE BBU boards. CE:UL384/ DL512) QWMDWB BPF400 Maxim um Numbe r to Be Configu red in a Single BBU Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell. CE:UL512/ DL768) Configuration Principle When the DC-HSDPA +MIMO feature is used: l If the WBBPd. or WBBPf3 is used. CE:UL256/ DL384) QWMDWB BPF301 Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell. The following table lists the LTE BBU board configurations. CE:UL384/ DL384) l A WBBPfx provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port. every three sectors are configured with one WBBP. Ltd. QWMDWB BPF101 Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell.. a cell can be shared by a maximum of six RRUs (2RX).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Function QWMDWB BPD200 Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell. a cell can be shared by a maximum of three RRUs (2RX). The WBBPd and WBBPf can be configured in the same base station. each sector must be configured with one WBBP. WBBPf2. l If the WBBPd1 is used. When the feature Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell is used: l If the WBBPd2 or WBBPd3 is used. and 46 . and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications. l Provides two FE/GE optical ports. 1 l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. In LTE or SRAN scenarios. For baseband specifications. expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900. instead for GL or UL.0. bandwidth. antenna configuration. 6 The number of LBBPs to be configured in a base station that supports LTE depends on the number of cells. Since SRAN8. and LTE to share one main control board. Ltd. WD2D00UM PT01 WD2D0LBB PC00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) l Provides two FE/GE electrical ports. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. see Transmission Port Specifications. Universal Main Processin g and Transmis sion Board (4 E1s & 1 Electrical FE/GE port & 1 Optical FE/GE port. The main control board can be configured in 1+1 backup mode for LTE only. the UMPTa2 allows any two or all triple modes of GSM. UMTS. two UMPT boards can share a signaling resource pool. see Signaling Specifications. l Provides four E1s/T1s. see CPRI Specifications. obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description. l Contains a GPS satellite card..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference NOTE For the board specifications. UMPTa2) Universal main processing and transmission unit type a2 (UMPTa2) LTE Baseband Processin g Unit C LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPc): provides six CPRI ports. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l For transmission specifications. l For signaling specifications. but the UMPTa2 and LMPT cannot be configured in the same BBU. see Baseband Specifications. Table 4-20 LTE BBU board configurations Model Descript ion Function Maxim um Quantit y Configuration Principle WD2D00LM PT00 LTE Main Processin g& Transmis sion Unit (With GPS Card) LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) 1 One LMPT or UMPTa2 must be configured in a base station of which the supported modes include LTE. WD2D0LBB PD02 LTE Baseband Processin g Unit D2 LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd2): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port. DL 2x2 MIMO. The LBBPc and LBBPd can be configured in the same base station. one LBBPc supports three cells. and each LBBP is configured with a maximum of six RF modules. WD2DLBBP D101 LTE Baseband Processin g Unit D1 LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd1): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port. 47 .4/3/5/10 MHz. l When DL 4x2 MIMO or UL 4antenna receive diversity is used. When the LBBPc is configured: l In SISO. Ltd. A BBU in LTE mode is configured with at least one LBBP..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descript ion Function WD2DLBBP D100 LTE Baseband Processin g Unit D1 LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd1): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port. Maxim um Quantit y Configuration Principle number of CPRI ports to be supported by the base station. or one cell with a scalable bandwidth of 15/20 MHz. l When DL 2x2 MIMO and UL 2x2 MU-MIMO is used. and UL 2x2 MU-MIMO modes. one LBBPc supports three cells. each with a scalable bandwidth of 1. the three Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz. each with a scalable bandwidth of 1. each LBBPd3 supports a maximum of six cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1. l When 2x2 MIMO. or 4way receive diversity is used. for example. each LBBPd1 supports a maximum of three cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1. 4x2 MIMO.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz. 3 x (5 MHz/10 MHz+10 MHz) or (15 MHz +5 MHz+5 MHz). and the six cells can use different bandwidth..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descript ion Function WD2D0LBB PD03 LTE Baseband LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd3): Provides Maxim um Quantit y Configuration Principle cells supported by a single LBBPc can be configured with different bandwidth. Ltd. each LBBPd2 supports a maximum of three cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1. When the LBBPd is configured: l When 2x2 MIMO is used. l When 2x2 MIMO is used. 48 .4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For baseband specifications. l For signaling specifications. l For transmission specifications. Ltd. 49 . see Baseband Specifications.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Model 4 Version Difference Descript ion Function Processin g Unit D3 six CPRI ports and one HEI port. see Signaling Specifications. and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications.. expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900. Maxim um Quantit y Configuration Principle WD2DLBBPD100 will no longer be sold but will gradually be replaced by WD2DLBBPD101. see Transmission Port Specifications. and baseband processing board in the BBU. power and environment interface unit. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see CPRI Specifications. Common Board Configurations This section describes the principles for configuring common boards in a BBU. obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description. NOTE For the board specifications. The following table lists the principles for configuring common main control board. At a site where capacity needs to be expanded. Ltd. -48 V Power and Environment Interface Unit HERT BBU WD2MUPEUC. the BBU (02310JJE) is configured with a UPEUd board by default. the capability of circuit breakers must be greater than or equal to 20 A because the circuit breakers of existing cabinets need to be restructured during the capacity expansion.HE RT BBU. if one or two UPEUa boards have been configured. one more UPEUd board needs to be configured.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-21 Main control board. which provides 650 W power. the BBU will be powered off. If power backup (less than or equal to 360 W) is required or high-power RRUs (greater than 360 W and less than or equal to 650 W) need to be configured. 50 . which provides 360 W power. WD2M00 PEIUD2 Function Module. Power supply module of 360 W in a BBU. At a site where capacity needs to be expanded. The UPEUa and UPEUc boards cannot be configured together. the BBU (02319940) is configured with a UPEUc board by default.WD2 MUPEUD2. power and environment interface unit.. HERT BBU. one more UPEUc board needs to be configured. Therefore. 2 At a new site. only the UPEUa board in the BBU supplies power and the power consumption of the BBU exceeds the maximum power supply of the UPEUa board. if the power consumption of a BBU is 360 W and the UPEUc board malfunctions. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Power and Environment Interface Unit(-48 V) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Function Module. the total power supply capacity ranges from 330 W to 360 W. The UPEUa and UPEUc boards use different designs.WD2MUPE UD2. replace the UPEUa board with two UPEUc boards. As a result. add a UPEUc board. If they are configured together. and baseband processing board External Model Descriptio n Function Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle WD2M00 0PEU03 HERT BBU WD2MUPE UC. If power backup (less than or equal to 650 W) is required. If a UPEUc board has been configured before capacity expansion. -48 V Power and Environment Interface Unit 2 At a new site. Power and Environment Interface Unit (-48 V) Power supply module of 650 W in a BBU. In a coMPT multimod e base station or a hybridMPT base station configure d with two BBUs: 2 In a separateMPT base station: l One BBU: 2 l BBU interco nnecti on: 2 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) The UMPTb1 in UMTS mode is configured in the following scenarios: l From RAN14. universal main processing and transmission board In a coMPT multimod e base station or a hybridMPT base station configure d with one BBU: 1 A UMPTb1 must be configured in an eGBTS.. the UMPTb1 board is recommended for single-mode and multimode base stations. In this case. l A UMPTb1 is mandatory in a co-MPT multimode base station.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model Descriptio n Function Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle WD2DU MPTB10 0 Universal Main Processing and Transmissio n Board (4E1&1 Electrical FE/GE&1 Optical FE/ GE.0 onwards. a UMPTb1 must be configured in BBU 1. l Provides one CI port. this board can be configured to support the UMTS mode. l The UMPTb1 working in UMTS mode cannot be configured in the BBU where a WMPT is configured. l Provides four E1s/T1s. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0 onwards. The UMPTb1 in multi-mode is configured in the following scenarios: l From SRAN8. l The signaling specification exceeds 170 CNBAP/s. l There is a requirement for UMTS-to-LTE transition. l The base stations need to supportIPSec and PKI features. Ltd. 51 . l Provides one FE/GE optical port. The UMPTb1 board working in LTE mode cannot be configured in the BBU where an LMPT board has been configured. l A UMPTb1 is optional in the GU or GL multimode co-transmission scenarios where the GSM needs to supportIPSec and PKI features. l A separate-MPT base station needs to use UCIU+UMPT interconnection. l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. UMPTb1) UMPTb1. l More than six CPRI ports are required by GSM. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. 52 . l Provides four E1s/T1s. l Provides one CI port for BBU interconnectio n. UBRIb) Universal baseband radio interface unit (UBRIb) In a separateMPT base station: 1 A UBRIb board must be configured in the following scenarios: Provides six CPRI ports. l Provides CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT. In a coMPT multimod e base station or a hybridMPT base station configure d with two BBUs: 2 In a separateMPT base station: l One BBU: 2 l BBU interco nnecti on: 2 GM5D0U BRIB00 Universal BaseBand Radio Interface Board (6 CPRI interface.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model Descriptio n Function Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle WD2D0U MPTB01 Universal Main Processing & Transmissio n unit with 4 E1s and 2 FE/ GE ports. l Provides the GPS clock port. UMPTb2 UMPTb2. In a coMPT base station: 2 l RFUs and RRUs are configured. l A UBRIb needs to be configured to provide CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT where co-MPT is applied.. which include RRUs or RFUs in GSM mode. l For a new GSM only (eGBTS) or UMTS only site that needs to be synchronized with a GPS clock. In addition. a UMPTb2 board can be delivered. a UMPTb2 board is preferentially delivered. Ltd. For a new SRAN or LTE TDD site that needs to be synchronized with a GPS clock. a USCU board is preferentially delivered. universal main processing and transmission board In a coMPT multimod e base station or a hybridMPT base station configure d with one BBU: 1 l The UMPTb2 board achieves synchronization with a GPS clock. l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the UBBPd3 and UBBPd4 boards apply to the LTE single mode.0. In UMTS or LTE mode.0 onwards. a maximum of five baseband processing boards can be configure d.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model Descriptio n Function Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle WD2DU BBPD100 Universal Baseband Processing Unit d1 The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd1) provides six CPRI ports. Ltd. it is recommended that the existing baseband processing boards be fully configured and the UBBPd board be added to provide the remaining capacity. when the UMPT board is used as the main control board. UMTS single mode: l From RAN16. l In eRAN7. The UBBPd board can be used together with the WBBP or LBBP board. In GSM mode. antenna frequency hopping. the UBBP board must be configured for the GSM single mode in the following scenarios: l VAMOS FR. – The UBBPd6 configured with 2T2R supports a maximum of six cells.0 onwards. l The specifications of UBBPd4 through UBBPd6 in LTE only mode for different combinations of cells are as follows: – The UBBPd4 does not support the mixed combination of 2T2R and 2T4R or 4T4R. WD2DU BBPD300 Universal Baseband Processing Unit d3 The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd3) provides six CPRI ports. 53 . In capacity expansion scenarios. a maximum of six baseband processing boards can be configure d. The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd5) provides six CPRI ports. UBBPd4. 4T4R with a maximum of 3 cells of either mode.0. the UBBP board is recommended for the UMTS single mode.. WD2DU BBPD200 Universal Baseband Processing Unit d2 The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd2) provides six CPRI ports. l The AAU3902 supports the GSM mode. – The UBBPd5 supports a maximum of six 2T2R cells or supports a maximum of three 2T2R or 4T4R cells. UBBPd5. 4-way receive diversity. or MICC is enabled. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. VAMOS II. when the GTMUb board is used as the main control board.0. the UBBPd3. WD2DU BBPD400 WD2DU BBPD500 Universal Baseband Processing Unit d4 Universal Baseband Processing Unit d5 The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd4) provides six CPRI ports. and UBBPd6 boards apply to the LTE single mode. a maximum of six baseband processing boards can be configure d. LTE single mode: l In eRAN6. In GBSS16. The UBBPd board supports single mode or multiple modes sharing the same baseband processing board. – The UBBPd6 supports the combinations of any two of 2T2R. 2T4R. From SRAN9. the UBBPd board is recommended for UMTS only or LTE only mode. l In a GUL triple-mode base station. In SRAN7. UMTS configurations are the same as the configurations in UMTS only mode.. two BBUs can be interconnected to support three modes. 54 . For example. In SRAN8. l In a GL dual-mode base station. the UBBPd6 board must be configured. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The following table lists the principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU. transmission resources and clock signals can be shared between two interconnected BBUs. In RAN14. In SRAN6. In co-MPT scenarios. the UBBPd6 board must be configured. co-transmission is recommended. UBBPd4. Multimode and co-BBP scenarios: l In a GU dual-mode base station.0. In GL+U mode. UBBPd5. In addition.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model Descriptio n Function WD2DU BBPD600 Universal Baseband Processing Unit d6 The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd6) provides six CPRI ports. UBBPd3. UBBPd4. or GSM and LTE are deployed on one BBU and UMTS mode is deployed on the other BBU.0 onwards.0. UBBPd5. Configurations of LTE mode in GU+L mode are the same as those of LTE only mode. the UBBPd3. Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle – The UBBPd6 configured with either 2T4R or 4T4R supports a maximum of six cells.0. UBBPd2. which will enter the EOM phase. co-MPT is introduced. l In a UL dual-mode base station. the UMPT board is introduced to support the mainstream solution of co-transmission and the UTRPc board is used for the alternative solution of co-transmission.0. Ltd. the UTRPa board is introduced (used only for UMTS) to replace the UTRP3 and UTRP4 boards. or UBBPd6 board must be configured. The two BBUs cannot share transmission resources or clock signals. such as GU+L(G) and GL+U(G). From SRAN7. three modes can be deployed on two BBUs. GSM and UMTS are deployed on one BBU and LTE mode is deployed on the other BBU. the UBBPd1. or UBBPd6 board must be configured. l This board is required when the LTE mode is not configured with a main control board that has a builtin GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA function. WD2D0U SCU300 Universal Synchroniz ation Clock Unit Supporting GPS and BITS USCUb14. without a satellite card 1 This board needs to be configured for the LTE mode when any of the following conditions is met: l This board is required when a BITS reference clock source is used for the LTE mode.. l This board is required when the LTE mode is not configured with a main control board that has a builtin GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA function. l In GU/GL/UL dual-mode base station. l This board is required in either a single. l This board is required when the UMTS mode requires the OTDOA function. or RAN14. l This board is required when a BITS reference clock source is used for the LTE mode. clock board with a built-in ublox GPS satellite card 1 This board is optional and can be configured from SRAN7. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0.or multimode base station when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or RGPS clock is used for the LTE mode. For details about the transmission specifications. see Transmission Port. GBSS14. see the following contents in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description: Product Specifications > Technical Specifications of the BBU3900.0 onwards. l This board is required when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or RGPS clock is used for the LTE mode. clock board used for LTE.0.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference NOTE For details about the specifications of each board. l This board is required in a GU/GL/UL dual-mode base station where the Common Clock feature is activated and GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used. or when BITS clock synchronization is used for LTE. Ltd. l This board is required when GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used for the GSM or UMTS mode. Table 4-22 Principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU Model Descripti on Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD2D00 USCU00 Universal Satellite Clock Unit USCUb11. this board is required when GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used for GSM or UMTS. 55 . the UCIU board is required when a cabinet used by a 3900 series base station and a cabinet used by a 3012 series base station are installed side by side. 4 This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main control and transmission board in UMTS mode support ATM transmission and more than four E1s/T1s over ATM ports are required. 1 For a separate-MPT triple-mode base station. 4 This board is required when the E1 ports on the main control and transmission board in UMTS mode support IP transmission and more than four E1s over IP are required. It provides one port for connecting to the root BBU and five ports for connecting to the leaf BBUs. In this case. UMTS transmissio n extension board Supporting eight E1s over ATM QWMP0U TRP400 Iub IP Interface Unit (8 E1s) UTRP4.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descripti on Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD2D00 UCIU00 Universal Cascading Interface Unit UCIU for BBU interconne ction. Transmissi on extension board for GSM (UTRPb4) 1 This board is required when five to eight E1s/T1s need to be provided for GSM. Provides eight E1s/ T1s over TDM QWMD0U TRP300 Iub ATM Interface Unit (8 E1s) UTRP3. the GTMUb board is mandatory and the UCIU board cannot be used for BBU interconnection. UMTS transmissio n extension board Supporting eight E1s over IP Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 56 . GM5DUT RPB400 GSM TDM over E1/T1 Interface Unit In GU dual mode. BBU 0 needs to be configured with the UCIU if the two BBUs are interconnected by connecting the UCIU in one BBU and the UMPT in the other BBU.. 4 l This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main processing and transmission board in UMTS mode support ATM or IP transmission and more than four E1/T1 ports are required. 4 This board is required when two or more FE optical ports or any GE optical port is used by UMTS. UMTS transmissio n extension board Universal Transmissi on Resource Processing Unit (8E1/ T1) UTRPa: UMTS transmissio n extension board. UMTS transmissio n extension board 4 This board is required when two or more FE electrical ports or any GE electrical port is used by UMTS. this board is supported by using software. In SRAN7. Provides two FE/GE optical ports. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 57 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descripti on Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0U TRP900 Iub IP Interface Unit (4 FE/ GE Electrical ports) UTRP9.0 onwards. Iub IP Interface Unit (2 FE/ GE Optical ports) UTRP2. and the delivered board cannot be customized.0. Ltd. 4 This board is required when unchannelized STM-1 transmission is used by UMTS.0 and RAN14. Provides four FE/GE electrical ports. and the number of the boards to be configured is determined by the required number of FE/GE electrical ports. QWMD0U TRP600 QWMD0U TRPA00 Iub ATM Interface Unit (1Unchann elized STM-1) UTRP6. It provides eight ATM or IP over E1 ports. the UTRPc is configured by default. l The delivered UTRPa board supports the plug-andplay function in RAN14. l The ATM transmission and IP transmission cannot be used together. and the number of the boards to be configured is determined by the required number of E1/T1 ports.1. UMTS transmissio n extension board QWMP0U TRP200 Each board provides four FE/GE electrical ports. From RAN15. Provides one unchanneli zed STM-1 port l Each board provides eight E1/T1 ports.0 or RAN14.. l A BTS3900AL cabinet contains one surge protection box. l This board is required when a base station that uses triple-mode co-transmission is not configured with a UMPT. This board needs to be configured when more than two E1 surge protection packages are required.0. l Provide s two FE/GE optical ports. From SRAN7. This board needs to be configured when more than one FE/GE surge protection package is required. One piece needs to be configured when more than four surge protection boards are required. l This board is required when IPSec is used for UMTS and no UMPT is configured for UMTS. l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE surge protection package. l Every four E1 ports are configured with one package for surge protection. QCUBBB ULIG01 WD2P00U ELP00 WD2P0UF LPB00 Lighting Arrester Box SLPU: surge protection box for transmissio n 1 Universal E1/T1 Lighting Protection Unit UELP: universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit - Universal FE/GE Lighting Protection Unit UFLPb: universal FE/GE lightning protection unit - Issue 06 (2014-03-26) l Each surge protection box is configured with a maximum of four surge protection boards. l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with one package for surge protection. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descripti on Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMD0U TRPC00 Universal Transmissi on Resource Processing Unit (4 Electrical FE/GE ports & 2 Optical FE/ GE ports) Transmissi on extension board for WCDMA (UTRPc) 1 Optional. GBSS14. and eRAN3. UMTS.0 onwards.0. or LTE mode. 58 . When the GTMUa board is used. l This board is required when GE ports are required by GSM. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This board is introduced in SRAN7. and LTE modes can share one UTRPc board.0. The GSM.0. UMTS.. l This board is required when IPSec needs to be supported for GSM. the UTRPc board cannot be used for transmission capacity expansion. the UTRPc board is recommended for increasing FE/GE ports in all modes. RAN14. l Works in GSM. or is configured with a UMPT but requires expansion of the transmission capability. l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains two E1 surge protection packages. l Provide s four FE/GE electric al ports. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descripti on Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD2P0UF LPC00 Universal FE/GE Lighting Protection Unit UFLPc: universal FE/GE lightning protection unit - l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with one package for surge protection. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and GTMUb must be configured in GL CPRI MUX mode. NOTE The CPRI networking configuration principles apply to a BBU3900. Baseband processing boards that connect to fiber optic cables must be installed in slot 2 or 3. Ltd. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and WBBPf/UBBPd_U must be configured in UL CPRI MUX mode. 59 . l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE surge protection package. This board needs to be configured when more than one FE/GE surge protection package is required. Table 4-23 CPRI networking configuration principles Applicatio n Scenario Networking Topology Configuration Principle Multimode SDR RF modules in separateMPT scenarios Dual-star The dual-star topology is recommended.. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be installed in slot 2 or 3. The LBBPd/ UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and LTE signals. CPRI MUX l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and GTMUb must be configured in GU CPRI MUX mode.3 CPRI Networking Configurations The following table lists the CPRI networking configuration principles.2. The WBBPf/ UBBPd_U must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and UMTS signals. 4. The WBBPf/ UBBPd_U must be installed in slot 2 or 3. The LBBPd/ UBBPd_L or WBBPf/UBBPd_U must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE signals. The UBRIb must be installed in slot 1.. Both the GSM and UMTS baseband processing boards are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables. l In the UL SDR load-sharing networking topology. l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and UBRIb must be configured in GU CPRI MUX mode. l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and LBBPd/UBBPd_L must be configured in UL CPRI MUX mode.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Applicatio n Scenario Networking Topology Configuration Principle Multimode SDR RF modules in co-MPT scenarios CPRI MUX The CPRI MUX topology is recommended.The following table lists the relationships between sectors and RF modules. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and UBRIb must be configured in GL CPRI MUX mode.RF module configurationsConfiguration ScenarioRF Module ConfigurationTransmit diversity2x2 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the LBBPc/LBBPd/UBBPd_L and UBRI/UBRIb are configured. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be installed in slot 2 or 3. RFU and RRU ConfigurationRF Module Configurations 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station The type of RF modules to be used is determined by the frequency band. number of carriers. Both the GSM and LTE baseband processing boards are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables. Load sharing mode (for transition of existing sites) l In the GU SDR load-sharing networking topology. Ltd. For details about the frequency bands. l In the GL SDR load-sharing networking topology. 60 . number of sectors and carriers.3 RF Module Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules in a 3900 series base station. The UBRIb must be installed in slot 0 or 1. The UBRIb must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and LTE signals. Each sector is configured with at least one RF module. see technical specifications of RRUs and RFUs. and output power supported by each type of RF module. The number of RF modules to be configured depends on the number of sectors. The WBBPf/ UBBPd_U or LBBPd/UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE signals. the WBBPa/WBBPb/WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd_U and LBBPc/LBBPd/UBBPd_L are configured. The WBBPf/UBBPd_U must be installed in slot 2 or 3. 4. Baseband processing boards that connect to fiber optic cables must be installed in slot 2 or 3. and output power. The UBRIb must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and UMTS signals. the WBBPa/WBBPb/WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd_U and UBRI/UBRIb are configured. Both the UMTS and LTE baseband processing boards are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference MIMOMIMO PrimeTwo TX channels are required for one sector:Two 1T modulesa are configured for one sector.One 2Tb or 4T module is configured for one sector.DL 4x2 MIMODL 4x4 MIMOFour TX channels are required for one sector:Two 2T modules are configured for one sector.One 4T module is configured for one sector. 1T modules cannot be used in this configuration scenario. UL 4-way DiversityUL 2x4 multi-user MIMO (MUMIMO)Four RX channels are required for one sector:Two 2R modules are configured for one sector.One 4R module is configured for one sector.a: In versions earlier than SRAN6.0, when two 1T RF modules are configured to support MIMO, the two RF modules must be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports. From SRAN6.0 onwards, it is recommended that the two RF modules be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports.b: In UMTS mode, two 2T RF modules in one sector support UL 4-way diversity but do not support carrier or power expansion. If RFUs and RRUs are used in the same base station, they cannot operate in the same frequency band.The application scenarios supported by RF modules vary according to the working mode of the RF modules, as shown in the following table.RF module configuration restrictionsModeRestrictionGSMThe DRFUs support UL 4-way diversity.From GBSS16.0/SRAN9.0, the UBBPd is introduced to process GSM baseband signals and support UL 4-way diversity.The DRFU, RRU3004, and 2T RF modules support the transmit diversity.When 4-way receive diversity is used, two DRFUs must be configured.When PBT or transmit diversity is used, each DRFU or RRU3004 supports only one TRX. Each cell served by the GSM DRFU or RRU3004 supports a maximum of two TRXs. When transmit diversity is used, the maximum number of carriers supported by each GSM RF module with two transmit channels decreases by half.When transmit diversity is used, the DRFU and RRU3004 do not support PBT. When UL 4-way diversity is used, the DRFU does not support TMA. When 4-way diversity is used, each cell supports a maximum of two TRXs.In an eGBTS, the RF modules do not support transmit diversity.UMTSRFUs support transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity.RRUs support DL transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity.LTEThe following configuration scenarios are supported: 2x2 MIMO, UL 4-way diversity, DL 4x2 MIMO, UL 2x4 MU-MIMO, and DL 4x4 MIMO. When DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO is used, two cascaded 2T RF modules or one 4T RF module is required. 1T RF modules do not support DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO.RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 900 MHz. RFUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. RFU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M9EMRFU05 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUe for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM MRFUe working at the 900 M EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x125 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE (supported only in multimode base stations), GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU03 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM This module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. MRFUd working at the 900 M EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM This module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. MRFUd working at the 900 M PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU07 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU05 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, LTE, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9PMRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM This module will no longer be sold. MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU06 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5M9EMRFU13 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900MHz EGSM Enhanced MRFUd working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU06 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5M9PMRFU13 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM Enhanced MRFUd working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9PGRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9PGRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz PGSM This module will no longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9EGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz EGSM This module will no longer be sold. Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9PGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9PGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz PGSM Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EGRFU04 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9EGRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz EGSM Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EDRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) DRFU 900 MHz EGSM DRFU working with 35 MHz bandwidth at the 900 MHz EGSM band UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9PDRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) DRFU 900 MHz PGSM DRFU working with 25 MHz bandwidth at the 900 MHz PGSM band UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. RRUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration. RRU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M9P392900 RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3929 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E392931 RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3929 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E392800 RRU3928 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3928 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9PDRRU00 RRU3004 900 MHz PGSM RRU3004 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9EDRRU00 RRU3004 900 MHz EGSM RRU3004 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9PGRRU04 RRU3008 900 MHz PGSM RRU3008 V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9EGRRU06 RRU3008 900 MHz EGSM RRU3008 V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9PMRRU04 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3908 V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9EMRRU03 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference RRU3908 V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9P392600 RRU3926 for Multi-mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3926 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E392600 RRU3926 for Multi-mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3926 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9P393600 RRU3936 for Multi-mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3936, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E393600 RRU3936 for Multi-mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3936, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9P393800 RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3938, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E393800 RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3938, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1800 MHz.RFUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M18MRFU32 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU32 (used for the BTS3900AL)MRFUe for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x125 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU05 (used for the BTS3900, Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 or GL mode. GU. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and BTS3900L)WD5MP18MRFU15 (used for the BTS3900AL)MRFUd for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzEnhanced MRFUd working at the 1800 MHz band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. For details about the specifications.. UMTS. and output power. BTS3900A. DL: 1820 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode. or GL mode. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.WD5M18MRFU07 (used for the BTS3900. GU.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18GM5M18GRFU05 (used for the BTS3900. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M18392931RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. BTS3900A. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 1800 MHz BThis module will no longer be sold. and output power. number of carriers.UL: 1710 MHz to 1770MHz.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. and BTS3900L) GM5P18GRFU05 (used for the BTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 MMulti-carrier RFU working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. Multi-carrier RFU working at segment B of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. LTE. or GL mode. LTE. LTE. number of carriers.At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. BTS3900A.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.RRUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration. For details about the specifications. number of carriers. UMTS. UMTS. LTE. see Technical Specifications of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU03 (used for the BTS3900. and output power. or GL mode. For details about the specifications. DL: 1820 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM. and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU03 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 1800 MHz AThis module will no longer be sold. DL: 1805 MHz to 1875 MHzIt can work in GSM.WD5M18MRFU04 (used for the BTS3900. or GL mode. 65 .UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz.UL: 1725 MHz to 1785 MHz. UMTS.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. and BTS3900L)GM5P18GRFU03 (used for the BTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 M AThis module will no longer be sold. LTE.GM5M18GRFU04 (used for the BTS3900. and output power. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM. MRFU working at segment B of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. For details about the specifications. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM. number of carriers. UMTS.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference BTS3900A. GU. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. BTS3900A.UL: 1725 MHz to 1785 MHz. and BTS3900L)DRFU 1800 MDRFU working at 1800 MHz:Supporting the full 1800 MHz bandUL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. and BTS3900L)GM5P18GRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 M BThis module will no longer be sold.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18WD5M18MRFU06 (used for the BTS3900. BTS3900A. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18GM5M18DRFU00 (used for the BTS3900. For details about the specifications. Ltd. and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU05 (used for the BTS3900AL)MRFUd for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzThis module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. UMTS. BTS3900A. Multi-carrier RFU working at segment A of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. GU. GU. BTS3900A.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. number of carriers. and output power. BTS3900A. MRFU working at segment A of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. GU. and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU06 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18GM5M18GRFU03 (used for the BTS3900.UL: 1710 MHz to 1770 MHz. Multimode RF modules working at the 1800 MHz full bandThe module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. LTE. DL: 1805 MHz to 1875 MHzIt can work in GSM mode. or GL mode.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. For details about the specifications.B or Ver. DL: 1805 MHz to 1850 MHzIt can work in GSM. GU. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. LTE.WD5M18MRRU02RRU for Multi-Mode 1800 MHz BRRU3908 V1. number of carriers.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.B or Ver. For details about the specifications. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM. Ltd. The UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.WD5M18GRRU00RRU3008 1800 MHz ARRU3008 V1 working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. For details about the specifications.WD5M18393900RRU3939 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzRRU3939. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. 66 . UMTS.GM6M18DRRU00RRU3004 1800 MHzRRU3004 working at the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. or GL mode. LTE. GU.WD5M18392600RRU3926 Multi-Mode for 1800 MHzRRU3926 working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. UMTS. LTE.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.WD5M18MRRU01RRU for Multi-Mode 1800 MHz ARRU3908 V1. LTE. DL: 1835 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode. DL: 1805 MHz to 1850 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9Select this package based on the frequency band requirements. DL: 1835 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM. number of carriers. GU.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM..B or Ver. and output power. or GL mode. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode. number of carriers.WD5M18GRRU01RRU3008 1800 MHz BRRU3008 V1 working at the higher 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1740 MHz to 1785 MHz. number of carriers.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. For details about the specifications. blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. GU.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. UMTE. and output power. multimode RF module working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz. or GL mode. number of carriers.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and output power. UMTE. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. For details about the specifications. and output power. or GL mode. number of carriers. For details about the specifications. multimode blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. number of carriers. number of carriers.WD5M18393600RRU3936 Multi-Mode for 1800 MHzRRU3936. For details about the specifications.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. and output power.B or Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and output power. and output power. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. and output power.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. multimode RF module working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1740 MHz to 1785 MHz.WD5M18392800RRU3928 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. For details about the specifications.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The number of packages to be configured is determined Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or GL mode.WD5M18393800RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzRRU3938 working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. The UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. number of carriers. DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. GU. For details about the specifications. and output power.B or Ver. LTE. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz. or GL mode. or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. UMTE. DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It supports a maximum of four carriers. Ltd. DL: 869 MHz to 879 MHz It can work in UMTS mode. and output power.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver. For details about the specifications. number of carriers.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. BTS3900A. WD5M85MRRU02 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 850MHz RRU3908 V2. QWEMRRU50200 RRU for UMTS 850MHz (60 W) RRU3804 working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz. RFU configuration Model Counter Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M85MRFU00 (for BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L) WD5P85MRFU00 (for BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 850MHz MRFU V2 working at the 850 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. The maximum output power is 40 W. DL: 869 MHz to 891. QWEMRRU5A300 RRU for UMTS 850 MHz (40 W) RRU3801E working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 834 MHz.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference by the number of sectors. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.For details about the specifications. It can work in UMTS mode. WD5M85394200 RRU3942 for Multi-Mode 850 MHz RRU3942 working at 850 MHz: The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. see . It supports a maximum of two carriers. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. number of carriers.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver. RRUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration. For details about the specifications. number of carriers. 67 . number of carriers. UL: 824 MHz to 846.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM. and output power. or GU mode. BTS3900 cabinet. and output power. UMTE. DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM.UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. and output power.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. BTS3900 cabinet. UMTE. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver. GM6M85GRRU00 RRU3008 850MHz RRU3008 V1 working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz. DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.5 MHz. number of carriers. or GU mode. DL: 869MHz to 894MHzIt can work in GSM.B) or (Ver.For details about the specifications.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. multimode blade RRU working at the 850 MHz full band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. For details about the specifications.B) or (Ver. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. The maximum output power is 60 W.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver. UMTE. number of carriers.RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 850 MHz. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements. number of carriers.5 MHz It can work in GSM. and output power. DL: 869 MHz to 880 MHz It can work in UMTS mode. RRU configuration Model Counter Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5MJRUA850A RRU3936 MultiMode for 850MHz RRU3936. UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz. and output power. and output power.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and output power. or GU mode.For the specifications. number of carriers. RFUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. It supports four carriers and four antennas. BTS3900A.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements. For details about the specifications. UL: 824 MHz to 835 MHz. multimode RF module working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz. or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.B) or (Ver.For details about the specifications. QWMMWRFU8500 (for BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L) QWMPWRFU8500 (for BTS3900AL) RF Unit for UMTS 850 MHz (80 W) WRFU working at segment A of the 850 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.For details about the specifications.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver. BTS3900A. Ltd. BTS3900A. For details about the specifications. DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM mode. number of carriers. number of carriers. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. or GU mode. RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1900 MHz. For details about the specifications. DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM. BTS3900 cabinet. number of carriers. DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM. and output power. number of carriers. DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM mode. QWEMRRU20300 RRU for WCDMA 1900 MHz (40 W) RRU3801E working at 1900 MHz: UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz. UMTE. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and BTS3900L) GM5P19GRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU 1900 MHz B Multi-carrier RF module working at segment B of the 1900 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements. For details about the specifications. and output power.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.B or Ver. RRU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle GM6M19GRRU00 RRU3008 1900 MHz A RRU3008 V1 working at the lower 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz. multimode RF module working at the higher 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz. For details about the specifications. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. BTS3900A. BTS3900A. DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It supports a maximum of two carriers. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.For details about the specifications. and output power. number of carriers. multimode RF module working at the lower 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz. RFUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz. WD5M19MRRU02 RRU for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz B RRU3908 V1. BTS3900A. or GU mode. It can work in UMTS mode. and BTS3900L) WD5P19MRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit for multi-mode 1900 MHz A MRFU V1 working at segment A of the 1900 M band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. and BTS3900L) WD5P19MRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit for multi-mode 1900 MHz B MRFU V1 working at segment B of the 1900 M band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.. BTS3900A. BTS3900A. and output power. GM6M19GRRU01 RRU3008 1900 MHz B RRU3008 V1 working at the higher 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz. and output power. WD5M19MRRU01 RRU for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz A RRU3908 V1. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM mode.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference determined by the number of sectors. BTS3900 cabinet. UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz. or GU mode. 68 . see Technical Specifications of RRUs. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It supports a maximum of four carriers and its maximum output power is 60 W. BTS3900 cabinet. WD5M19MRFU02 (used for the BTS3900. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.For details about the specifications. DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM mode. UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz.D cabinets: 9At a Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and output power.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 RRUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration. and output power. GM5M19GRFU01 (used for the BTS3900. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site using Ver. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 GM5M19GRFU00 (used for the BTS3900. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. and BTS3900L) GM5P19GRFU00 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU 1900 MHz A Multi-carrier RF module working at segment A of the 1900 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. or GU mode. QWEMRRU20200 RRU for WCDMA 1900 MHz (60 W) RRU3804 working at 1900 MHz: UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz. It can work in UMTS mode. For details about the specifications. UMTE. number of carriers. BTS3900A. UMTE. UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. UMTE. The maximum output power is 40 W. RFU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M19MRFU01 (used for the BTS3900. number of carriers. BTS3900 cabinet.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver. 69 .BTS3900 cabinet.BTS3900 cabinet. BTS3900A.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. number of carriers. multimode blade RRU working at the 1900 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.BTS3900 cabinet. For details about the specifications. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. For details about the specifications.QWMMWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900. and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU4100 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (40 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x40 W.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.. For details about the specifications. see . BTS3900A. For details about the specifications.BTS3900 cabinet. BTS3900A. Ltd. It supports four carriers and four antennas. and output power. For details about the specifications.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. GU. number of carriers. BTS3900A. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. number of carriers. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. number of carriers.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and output power. DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.B or Ver. BTS3900A. and output power. and output power. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5MJRUA820A RRU3936 Multi-Mode for 1900 MHz RRU3936. or UL mode. and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFUA100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUa for WCDMA 2100MHz (1x100 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x100 W. see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU8102 (used for the BTS3900. and output power. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GL. LTE. and output power. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. BTS3900A.QWMMWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900. GL.RFUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. For the specifications. BTS3900A.BTS3900 cabinet. number of carriers. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUd for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. BTS3900A.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleQWMMWRFUA100 (used for the BTS3900. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS or LTE mode. and BTS3900L) QWMPWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUd for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. number of carriers. It supports a maximum of two sectors in 1T2R mode. and output power.UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz.BTS3900 cabinet. number of carriers. WD5M19394200 RRU3942 for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz RRU3942 working at 1900 MHz: The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. UMTS. or UL mode.For details about the specifications. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. BTS3900A. BTS3900A. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. LTE. and output power. For details about the specifications. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. number of carriers. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. UMTS.QWMMWRFU8101 (used for the BTS3900. and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU1101 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RF module working at the 2100 MHz frequency band (enhanced module of the WRFU whose output power is 80 W):The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. BTS3900A. UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz.QWMMWRFU4100 (used for the BTS3900. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 2100 MHz. and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU2100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUe for WCDMA 2100MHz (2x80 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. For details about the specifications. DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHzIt can work in GSM. GU. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. or Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BTS3900A. UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz.WD5M21383200RRU3832 for Multi-Mode AWSRRU3832. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. For details about the specifications.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. see Technical Specifications of RFUs.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.The RRU3832 supports two receive channels in RAN12. number of carriers.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383900RRU3839 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RRU3839. For details about the specifications. number of carriers.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. number of carriers. For details about the specifications.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS or LTE mode.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. number of carriers. and output power. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. and output power.B or Ver. number of carriers. 70 . see Technical Specifications of RRUs. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.B or Ver.B or Ver. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.WD5M21382401RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)Enhanced RRU3824.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. see Technical Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W. blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. BTS3900A.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and output power. For details about the specifications.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.0.0 and RAN13.RRUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. For details about the specifications. number of carriers. and BTS3900L) QWMPWRFU8100 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.B or Ver.WD5M21383800RRU3838 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3838.0. blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W. BTS3900A.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.0 and supports four carriers in RAN12. For details about the specifications. Ltd. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzBTS3900 cabinet. and output power.WD5M21382600RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RRU3826.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L using Ver. and output power. and output power. number of carriers. For details about the specifications. blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. and output power. number of carriers.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. and output power. and output power.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M21382400RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100MHz (60W)RRU3824.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.WD5M21382601RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)Enhanced RRU3826.B or Ver.The RRU3838 only supports four carriers in RAN12. blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. number of carriers. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. blade RRU working at the 2100 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. For details about the specifications. For details about the specifications.QWMMWRFU8100 (used for the BTS3900.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W..At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. DL: 2620 MHz to 2640 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. number of carriers.It supports a maximum of six UMTS carriers and its total output power is 2x60 W. number of carriers.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.QWEMRRU10200RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)RRU3804 working at 2100 MHz. which has entered the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz.B or Ver.It can work in UMTS mode. For details about the specifications. see Technical Specifications of Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.B or Ver. For details about the specifications. For details about the specifications. and output power.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. and output power. and output power. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. BTS3900A. For details about the specifications.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Specifications of RRUs. and BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU0C (applying to the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M C (2x40W)LRFU working at segment C of the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2520 MHz. and output power.The RRU3829 only supports four carriers in RAN12. and output power.B or Ver. which has entered the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz.. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports a maximum of two carriers.It can work in UMTS mode. For details about the specifications.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. and output power.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports a maximum of four carriers.QWEMRRU10700RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RRU3806 working at 2100 MHz. and output power.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. number of carriers.RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 7 (2600 MHz frequency band). or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.BTS3900 cabinet.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.QWEMRRU10800RRU for WCDMA/LTE 2100 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3808 working at 2100 MHz:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz.WD5M21382900RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RRU3829 working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.RFUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RFU configurations. blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz.The RRU3828 only supports four carriers in RAN12.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. number of carriers.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site using Ver.WD5M21382401RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)Enhanced RRU3824.RFU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M26LRFU0C (applying to the BTS3900. For details about the specifications. Ltd. and output power.QWEMRRU10300RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (40 W)RRU3801E working at 2100 MHz. number of carriers. number of carriers. number of carriers. number of carriers. For details about the specifications.It supports a maximum of four UMTS carriers and its total output power is 80 W.0.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. For details about the specifications. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. BTS3900A.WD5M21MRRU00RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3828 working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode. 71 . DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. which has entered the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz.It can work in UMTS mode. For details about the specifications.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. number of carriers. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports a maximum of four carriers.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. The maximum output power is 80 W. and output power.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.WD5M21382601RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)Enhanced RRU3826. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS or LTE mode. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. The maximum output power is 40 W. The maximum output power is 60 W.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.0. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.WD5M26LRRU0CRRU for LTE 2600M C (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment C of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2500 MHz to 2520 MHz. and BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU0E (applying to the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M E (2x40W)LRFU working at segment E of the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. DL: 2620 MHz to 2640 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.For details about the specifications. blade RRU working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:Its maximum output power is 2x40 W.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.For details about the specifications.WD5M26LRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. and BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M D (2x40W)LRFU working at segment D of the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.For details about the specifications.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference RFUs.For details about the specifications.WD5M26326200RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x60W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver. or BTS3900L cabinet: Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. number of carriers. DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.B or Ver. number of carriers. and output power.B or Ver.For details about the specifications. DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.WD5M26LRRU68RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W)RRU3268.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleQCYMAWSRFU01 (used for the BTS3900.2T4R)RRU3240 working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.2T4R)RRU3260. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver..C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.RRUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RRU configurations.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.WD5M26LRRU0DRRU for LTE 2600M D (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment D of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2510 MHz to 2560 MHz. DL: 2670 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. Ltd. BTS3900A. BTS3900A.RRU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M26324000RRU3240 for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.B or Ver. number of carriers. DL: 2630 MHz to 2680 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. and output power. DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. 72 . BTS3900A. BTS3900A.BTS3900 cabinet.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.DBS3900:18 (when the BBU is installed in a rack)12 (when the BBU is installed in the APM30H)For details about the specifications. DL: 2670 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz. number of carriers. number of carriers. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. and output power. blade RRU working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2510 MHz to 2560 MHz.WD5M26326000RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W.WD5M26LRRU0ERRU for LTE 2600M E (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment E of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2550 MHz to 2570 MHz.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver. and output power.UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz.WD5M26LRFU0E (applying to the BTS3900.B or Ver.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.B or Ver.For details about the specifications.2T4R)RRU3262 working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. and output power.RFUs Working at Band 4 (AWS)The following table lists the RFU configuration. and output power.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz.UL: 2550 MHz to 2570 MHz.RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS). and BTS3900L) QCYPAWSRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL)CRFUd for LTE AWS (2x60 W)RF module working at the AWS band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. DL: 2630 MHz to 2680 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. number of carriers. UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz.It can work in UMTS mode. DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and output power.B or Ver. and output power.RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 13 (700 MHz frequency band). number of carriers. blade RRU working at the AWS bandThe module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5MAW384100RRU for LTE AWS (4T4R.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. For details about the specifications.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.For details about the specifications.UL: 832 MHz to 862 MHz.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. DL: 791 MHz to 821 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. LTE. and output power. and output power. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. number of carriers.RRU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU01RRU for LTE 700MHz (2x40W)RRU3201 working at band 13 (700 MHz frequency band):The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RRUs Working at Band 13 (700 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RRU configurations. DL: 746 MHz to 757 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. 73 . BTS3900A.B or Ver.RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 800 MHz.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.For details about the specifications..C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. and output power. number of carriers.UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver. number of carriers. or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.QWEMRRU40200RRU for WCDMA AWS (60 W)RRU3804 working at the AWS band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz. DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in UMTS.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M08LRFU0E (used for the BTS3900. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 12 (700 MHz frequency band).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. DL: 728 MHz to 746 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.RRU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU00RRU for LTE 700MHz (2x40W)RRU3203 working at band 12 (700 MHz frequency band):The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. For details about the specifications.RRUs Working at Band 12 (700 MHz Frequency Band) The following table lists RRU configurations. For details about the specifications. number of carriers. or UL mode. BTS3900A. or UL SDR mode.B or Ver. DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in UMTS. 2x60W/4x30W)RRU3841 working at the AWS band:It works in 4T4R mode and provides maximum output power of 2x60 W or 4x30 W.RFUs Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. Ltd. LTE. For details about the specifications. number of carriers.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver. For details about the specifications. and output power.UL: 776 MHz to 787 MHz. see Technical Specifications of RFUs.BTS3900 cabinet. and output power. and BTS3900L) WD5P08LRFU0E (used for the BTS3900AL)LRFU for LTE 800 M (2x60 W)LRFUe working at 800 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.QWEMRRU40800RRU for WCDMA/LTE AWS (2x40 W) RRU3808 working at the AWS band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz.RRUs Working at Band 4 (AWS)The following table lists the RRU configuration. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. and output power.WD5M21383200RRU3832 for AWS (2x60 W)RRU3832.BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.UL: 698 MHz to 716 MHz.RRUs Working at Band 20 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. number of carriers. number of carriers. For details about the specifications.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. see Technical Specifications of RFUs. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. blade RRU working at the 800 MHz full band:The maximum output power is 2x40 W.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.B or Ver. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. For details about the specifications. 2x40 W)RRU3268 working at the APT700 frequency band: It works in 2T2R mode and provides maximum output power of 2x40 W. AAU3910 Configuration This section describes the AAU3910 configuration principles. and output power.UL: 703 MHz to 743 MHzDL: 758 MHz to 798 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.1 AAU Configuration This section describes the AAU configuration principles.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors.WD5MD8LRRU00RRU for LTE 800 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3222 working at the 800 MHz frequency band: UL: 832 MHz to 862 MHz.UL: 832 MHz to 847 MHz.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.WD5MD8LRRU0BRRU for LTE 800 MHz B (2x40 W) RRU3220 working at segment B of the 800 MHz band:UL: 842 MHz to 862 MHz.3. For details about the specifications. number of carriers.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. DL: 791 MHz to 806 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. For details about the specifications. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and output power. number of carriers.UL: 718 MHz to 748 MHzDL: 773 MHz to 803 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. and output power. see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M07LRRU03RRU for LTE APT700 (2T2R. For details about the specifications. see Technical Specifications of RRUs. number of carriers. DL: 791 MHz to 821 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. and output power. RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference (800 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration.RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS).RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5MD8LRRU0ARRU for LTE 800 MHz A (2x40 W)RRU3220 working at segment A of the 800 MHz band:UL: 832 MHz to 847 MHz. 74 . DL: 791 MHz to 806 MHzIt can work in LTE mode. DL: 801 MHz to 821 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.RF modules working at Band 28 (700 MHz APT) 4.Configuration of RRUs Working at Band 28 (APT700)The following table lists the RRU configuration. 2x40 W)RRU3268 working at the APT700 frequency band: It works in 2T2R mode and provides maximum output power of 2x40 W.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU02RRU for LTE APT700 (2T2R.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. Ltd.B or Ver. number of carriers.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.WD5M08LRRU68RRU for LTE 800 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3268.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-45 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD7M18MAA U00 AAU3910 1800MHz (2T2R. 2x63 dBm).1/2. For carrier power specifications of the RU3938. 75 . l UL: 1710 to 1785 MHz. 1920 to 2170 MHZ/2500 to 2690 (DL) 1. see technical specifications of the RRU3938. 1710 to 1880 MHz (UL). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. DL: 1805 to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.. which is in 2T2R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. l It can provide a 4port broadband antenna of 2100 MHz/2600 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs. l An RU3938 is used.8 A (2T2R)+2. RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2100 MHz). Ltd.6 P: 6 Each sector is configured with an AAU. 6 P: 6 Each sector is configured with an AAU. 76 . RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2600 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2600 MHz). Ltd.8/2.. l It can provide a 4port broadband antenna of 1800 MHz/2600 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs. which is in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x60 W. see technical specifications of the RRU3832.1 A (2T4R)+1. 2x65 dBm). 1920 MHz to 2170MHz (UL). l It can work in UMTS mode. 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz/2500 MHz to 2690 MHZ (DL) 2.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-46 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD7M21WAA U00 AAU3910 2100 MHz (2T4R. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz For carrier power specifications of the RU3832. l An RU3832 is used. 2500 MHz to 2690MHz (UL). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 A (2T2R)+PCS/ 1. 2x63 dBm). l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz.1/AWS P: 6 Each sector is configured with an AAU. For carrier power specifications of the RU3260. 2500 MHz to 2690MHz (UL).1/AWS P: l An RU3268 is used. l It can provide a 4port broadband antenna of PCS/1800 MHz/2100 MHz/ AWS for external RRUs and RFUs. 1710 MHz to 2170MHZ (DL) 2. DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.8/2.. l It can work in LTE mode. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz. WD7M26LAA U01 AAU3910 2600 MHz (2T2R. 2x63 dBm).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-47 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2600 MHz) Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD7M26LAA U00 AAU3910 2600 MHz (2T4R. l It can provide a 4port broadband antenna of PCS/1800 MHz/2100 MHz/ AWS for external RRUs and RFUs. DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz 6 Each sector is configured with an AAU. 77 . see technical specifications of the RRU3268. which is in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. For carrier power specifications of the RU3268. Ltd.6 A (2T4R)+PCS/ 1. which is in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. see technical specifications of the RRU3260. 1710 MHz to 2170MHZ (DL) 2.8/2. l An RU3260 is used. RF modules working at mixed frequency bands RUs working at 1800 MHz. 2100 MHz. DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz l It can work in UMTS. or UL mode. 2x65dBm). see technical specifications of the RRU3832. 1850 1990 MHz (DL) AWS A(2T4R) +PCS P: 6 Each sector is configured with an AAU. LTE. l It can provide a 4port antenna of PCS for external RRUs or RFUs. and 2600 MHz can form 2 A configurations (highfrequency module in the upper slot and low-frequency module in the lower slot).1770 MHz/2110 2170 MHz (UL).. 1710 . For carrier power specifications of the RU3832. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz. as listed in the following table. Ltd. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l An RU3832 is used.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS). Table 4-48 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS) Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD7MAWSA AU00 AAU3910 AWS (2T4R. which is in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x60 W. 78 . 1 A (2T4R) + 1. 1920 MHz to 2170 MHz (UL). 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz/2500 MHz to 2690 MHz (DL) 2. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode.8 A RF module: l It works in 2T2R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. For carrier power specifications of the RU3938 and RU3832.8 A (2T2R) 6 Each sector is configured with an AAU. 2T2R.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-49 Configuration principles for RF modules working at mixed frequency bands Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD7MWMJA AU00 AAU3910 2100 MHz+1800 MHz (2T4R. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. An RU3832 is used as a 2. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz. 2x63dBm). 2x65dBm. see technical specifications of the RRU3938 and RRU3832.. An RU3938 is used as a 1. Ltd.1 A RF module: l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. DL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. 79 . An RU3832 is used as a 2. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz. l It works in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. 2x63 dBm.6 A RF module. DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode. 2500 MHz to 2690 MHz (UL).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD7MWLJAA U00 AAU3910 2600 MHz+2100 MHz (2T4R.1 A RF module: l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. Ltd.1 A (2T4R) 6 Each sector is configured with an AAU.6 A (2T4R) + 2.. 2x65 dBm). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz (DL) 2. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz. For carrier power specifications of the RU3832 and RU3260. 80 . An RU3260 is used as the 2. see technical specifications of the RRU3832 and RRU3260. 2T4R. 81 . 2500 MHz to 2690 MHz (UL). For carrier power specifications of the RU3938 and RU3260. 2x63 dBm). DL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. Ltd.. l It works in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD7MLMJAA U00 AAU3910 2600 MHz+1800 MHz (2T4R. 2T2R.6 A RF module. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz. 2x63 dBm. An RU3938 is used as a 1. see technical specifications of the RRU3938 and RRU3260.8 A (2T2R) 6 Each sector is configured with an AAU.8 A RF module: l It works in 2T2R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz (DL) 2. AAU3902 Configuration This section describes configuration principles and typical configurations of an AAU3902. An RU3260 is used as the 2. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz.6 A (2T4R) + 1. For example.1 GHz in 4RX mode. The number of RF modules is determined by the number of sectors. l In sector splitting scenarios: – If a sector is split vertically.. NOTE a: In 4RX mode.0 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 82 . Therefore. 1G RU44-1. the WBBPb and WBBPd only support small specifications. – An RU44-2.0 2100 A+ 1800 A+ (790 to 960) P+ (1710 to 2690) P 1 1 1 1 0 SRAN9.1Ga supports a maximum of eight 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R or 2T4R carriers. It does not support 1T4R and 2T4R carriers. an AAU3902 supports two sectors.1Ga supports a maximum of four 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R carriers. number of carriers. the WBBPf is recommended for an RU44 of 2. Typical configurations of an AAU3902 The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902. and they do not support CPRI MUX. Table 4-50 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Typical Configurations MU02 RU44-2. – and an RU44-2. Therefore.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference AAU3902 Configuration Principles The AAU3902 configuration principles are as follows: l Each sector needs to be configured with an AAU3902. the 4RXD mode (1T4R/2T4R/4T4R) is not supported.0 1800 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P 1 0 1 1 0 SRAN9. the configuration of six sectors is not supported. l An AAU3902 with one active unit can be converted to support two active units. l In sector splitting scenarios. l In non-sector-splitting scenarios: – One AAU3902 supports a sector with horizontal beamwidth of 65°. each with a horizontal beamwidth of 65 degrees. and output power. – or a 2600 MHz RU44 can be added to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration. 8G PU 22 CU0 2 Supporting Version 2100 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P 1 1 0 1 1 SRAN8. and therefore does not apply to an omni-directional site. – an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P configuration to support the 2100 A+1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration. l The AAU3902 is an antenna with horizontal beamwidth of 65°. Ltd. or a 2600 MHz RU44can be added to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration. 83 . The following table lists the configurations. an MU02. 1710 MHz to 2690 MHz 6 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors. and a CU. number of carriers. A package consists of an AU02V. 790 MHz to 960 MHz. Typical AAU3902 Conversion An AAU3902 with one active unit can be converted to support two active units. an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration. a PU22. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Its package contains an RU44 of 2100 MHz. The following figure shows the conversion. Table 4-51 Principles for configuring an AAU3902 BOM Code Model Descriptio n Function Maximu m Quantit y Configuration Principle 02310TJ D WD7MR44 M0200 2100 A +(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P AAU3902 RU44-2100 MHz (2x63 dBm).1G. The following figure shows the conversion.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference The typical configuration of an AAU3902 is 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P. It can connect to a high-frequency RRU/RFU and a low-frequency RRU/RFU. For example. an RU44-2. and output power.. . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Power Module This section describes configuration principles for the power modules used by 3900 series base stations. 84 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Figure 4-1 AAU3902 conversion 4.3. Ltd. BTS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900. among which six ports use big toolless female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). 1 l Optional. 85 . Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. It cannot provide power for highpower RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. including RRU3829. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports. RRU3929. DCDU11B00 000 DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-11 B). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. RRU3841. 1 l Optional. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-52 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900 Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle DCDU03B00 000 DC power distribution unit A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs. RRU3961. Ltd. and RRU3839. RRU3942. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro+distributed base station.. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A +3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. RRU3939. RRU3832. Ltd. This module is used in DC cabinets and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers. Power supply module. l Each package contains a PSU. l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle TD1MDCD U12B0 DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power. 30A l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l In AC power supply scenarios. WPSU50A01 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) PSU Module (AC/DC). l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 2900 W.C. 50 A Power supply module. used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power. 1 W0ACPSU0 0 PSU Module (AC/DC). 86 . the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet. 1 l Optional. one or more PSU packages need to be configured. When more than two PSUs are required. l In AC input scenarios.. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors). the original power supply system contains two PSUs.B. 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver. and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet. 87 . the power equipment houses two PSUs by default. used for converting +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power. the power equipment houses two PSUs by default. l In +24 V DC input scenarios. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. and this module needs to be configured when more than two PSUs are required. power module in the BBU. used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power. providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. l Optional. 2 W0DCPSU0 0 PSU Module (DC/DC) l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. l It is optionally configured in Ver. In addition.D. WD2M000P EU03 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) -48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit UPEUc.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2MR485 0G00 PSU module (AC/DC) Power supply module. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU.B cabinets supplied with +24 V DC power. l Each package contains one PSU. l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. l In AC input scenarios.. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU. Ltd. 3 l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver. Power module. 2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A maximum of two PSUs can be added to a cabinet. If this UPEU is configured. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. power module in the BBU. In addition. 2 l Optional. BTS3900L The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L. 88 . it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910. Ltd. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2M00PE IUD2 Power and Environmen t interface Unit(-48V) UPEUd. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default.. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l If a second UPEU. is configured. 1 l Optional.. TD1MDCD U12B0 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-12B ). RRU3942. It provides ten 30 A circuit breakers. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors). among which six ports use big toolless female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). RRU3929. 1 l Optional. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Optional. RRU3961.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-53 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle DCDU03B00 000 DC power distribution unit A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs. It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs. and RRU3839. RRU3841. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A +3x12 A power outputs. It cannot provide power for highpower RRUs. RRU3832. RRU3939. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro+distributed base station. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. including RRU3829. Ltd. 89 . DCDU11B00 000 DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-11B ). l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. 90 . The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2MR485 0G00 PSU module (AC/DC) Power supply module. 3 l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver. l In AC input scenarios. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. the power equipment houses two PSUs by default. Ltd. UPEUc.D. l If a second UPEU. In addition. used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. is configured. providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. l Optional. 2 WD2M000P EU03 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference -48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. power module in the BBU. 2 l Optional. Ltd. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.It applies only to the BBU3910. power module in the BBU. BTS3900A The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A. providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2M00PE IUD2 Power and Environmen t interface Unit(-48V) UPEUd. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. is configured. 91 . l If a second UPEU. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors). l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. 1 l Optional. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. It cannot provide power for highpower RRUs. l Optional.. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. TD1MDCD U12B0 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). including RRU3829. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. RRU3832. RRU3929. RRU3942. RRU3939. It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs. 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 92 . RRU3961. Ltd. DCDU11B00 000 DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-11 B). among which six ports use big toolless female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro+distributed base station. RRU3841. and RRU3839.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-54 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle DCDU03B00 000 DC power distribution unit A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs. 1 l Optional. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A +3x12 A power outputs. It provides ten 30 A circuit breakers. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro+distributed base station. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. l In AC input scenarios. WPSU50A01 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference PSU Module (AC/DC). l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.. A maxim um of one piece can be configu red. 50 A Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Power supply module. the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet. the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet. The actual configuration quantity depends on the total power consumption of the equipment. l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle W0ACPSU0 0 PSU Module (AC/DC). l A PSU provides a power supply of 1600 W. 93 . 30 A Power supply module. used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power. l A PSU provides a power supply of 2900 W. l In AC input scenarios. A maxim um of one piece can be configu red. One additional PSU is required at sites where a diesel generator is used.C. The actual quantity to be configured depends on the total power consumption of the equipment.B. One additional PSU is required at sites where a diesel generator is used. Ltd. used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power. The actual quantity to be configured depends on the total power consumption of the equipment. power module in the BBU. is configured. Each AC cabinet is configured with at least three PSUs (including the two PSUs in the original power system) at a site where a diesel generator is used. l If a second UPEU. l A PSU provides a power supply of 3000 W. l In AC input scenarios. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2MR485 0G00 PSU module (AC/DC) Power supply module. 2 l Optional. Ltd.. In addition. used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power. and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. UPEUc. l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default.D. 94 . the power equipment houses two PSUs by default. WD2M000P EU03 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference -48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver. A maxim um of three pieces can be configu red. BTS3900AL The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. l If a second UPEU.It applies only to the BBU3910. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default.. 95 . 2 l Optional.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2M00PE IUD2 Power and Environmen t interface Unit(-48V) UPEUd. power module in the BBU. Ltd. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. is configured. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. In addition. providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If a second UPEU. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910. In addition. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. is configured. 96 . l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. l If a second UPEU. power module in the BBU. In addition. providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. UPEUd. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. l Optional. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. power module in the BBU. Ltd. providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. 2 l Optional. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-55 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2P000PE U00 Power and Environmen t interface Unit (-48 V) UPEUc. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. 2 WD2P00PE UD00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Power and Environmen t interface Unit (-48 V) l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. is configured.. It is used in DC cabinets and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors). 97 . Ltd.. 50 A Power supply module. the original power supply system contains two PSUs. This module is used in an AC cabinet and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors). l Optional. and a maximum of five PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l In AC power supply scenarios. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l When a BTS3900AL AC cabinet is configured with DC RRUs. used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power. 2 DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). l When a BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured with DC RRUs. l Each AC cabinet is configured with at least three PSUs (including the two PSUs in the original power system) at a site where a diesel generator is used. a DCDU-12B is required for every six DC RRUs.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2MR485 0G00 PSU Module (AC/DC). DCDU12BP AC00 DCDU12BP DC00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) DC Power Distribution Unit (AC Cabinet) DC Power Distribution Unit (DC Cabinet) DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). 2 l Optional. l Optional components in the AC cabinet l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. A maxim um of five pieces can be configu red. a DCDU-12B is required for every six DC RRUs. RRU3961. l The DCDU-11B can be used if the site is configured with RRU3829. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports. Each DCDU supports a maximum of six groups of power cables for DC RRUs. l Each DCDU-11B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference DBS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900. RRU3942. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A +3x12 A power outputs. or RRU3839. 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. RRU3832. RRU3939. Ltd. It provides ten 25 A DC power outputs. among which six ports use big toolless female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l The DCDU-03B can be used if the site is not configured with RRU3829. RRU3961. RRU3841. 98 . l Each DCDU-03B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. l Optional. RRU3942. RRU3939. RRU3929. RRU3841. DCDU11B00 000 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-11 B). Table 4-56 Principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900 Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle DCDU03B00 000 DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-03 B) 3 l Optional. or RRU3839. RRU3832.. RRU3929. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l When an AC RRU consists of an RRU3824/RRU3826/ RRU3929/RRU3926/ RRU3936/RRU3838/ RRU3832/RRU3260/ RRU3268/RRU3938/ RRU3939 and an AC/DC module. Ltd. l Each DCDU-12B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. Each AC RRU is configured with one of this module. this module must be quoted. In addition. is configured.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle TD1MDCD U12B0 DC power distribution unit DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. power module in the BBU. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors). 2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. WD5PMPW 80000 AC/DC RRU power module AC/DC RRU power module - WD5PACDC PM00 AC/DC RRU power module AC/DC power module for a blade RRU - l Optional. 99 . l Optional. WD2M000P EU03 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) -48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit UPEUc. l WD5PMPW80000 is replaced by WD5PACDCPM00. l If a second UPEU.. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. 3 l Optional. Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers. power module in the BBU. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. 100 . In addition. providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU.. BTS3900C The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C. Ltd. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910. l If a second UPEU. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2M00PE IUD2 Power and Environmen t interface Unit (-48 V) UPEUd. is configured. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. 2 l Optional. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l If a second UPEU. power module in the BBU. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l Optional.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-57 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C Model Descriptio n Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD2P000PE U01 -48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit UPEUc. In addition. 1 l Optional. providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. power module in the BBU.. In addition. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. 101 . it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910. is configured. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W.3. which occupies the same slot as the UEIU. is configured. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. UPEUd. the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. 1 WD2P00PE UD01 Power and Environmen t interface Unit (-48 V) l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. Ltd. l If a second UPEU.3 RET Module Configurations The following table lists the configurations of an RET module. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. GSM board NOTE In GSM mode. a common TMA cannot be used with an RET antenna. Transmission Cables/Packages The following table lists transmission cables and transmission packages for 3900series base stations..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-58 Configurations of an RET module External Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle GM5M00GAT M00 Antenna and TMA Control Unit RET antenna and TMA control module 2 This module is configured when DRFUs have been configured for GSM mode and a TMA or RET antenna is in use. 102 . Ltd. When DRFUs are configured at a site and the RET antenna is required. the GATM must be configured. Installation Auxiliary Materials This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials used for installing 3900 series base stations. Each GATM supplies power to three BiasTees. When DRFUs are configured at a site and the TMA function is required.0 supports a smart TMA which can be used with an RET antenna. 4.3. the GATM must be configured. GBSS12.4 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the installation and site auxiliary materials. because the overcurrent of RET antenna adjustment will mistakenly cause a TMA alarm. Each GATM supplies power to six BiasTees. Ltd. 10 m) - l It needs to be configured when 75-ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is required.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-59 Installation auxiliary materials for 3900series base stations Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0004E100 Trunk Cable (75 ohm. QWMP0004E101 Trunk Cable (120 ohm.B or Ver. QWMP0000FE00 Ethernet Cable - l It needs to be configured when FE/GE electrical ports are used. 10 m) - l It needs to be configured when 120-ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is required. 4 E1. l One piece is configured for every four E1s.C cabinets). l One piece is configured for every FE/GE.. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l One piece is configured for every FE/GE (only configured for Ver. 103 . LTIP000FBR00 Optical Fiber - l It needs to be configured when FE/GE optical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every four E1s. 4 E1. Jumper Packages The following table lists jumper packages for 3900series base stations.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0000FE02 Optical Fiber (FE/ STM-1) - l It needs to be configured when FE/ STM-1optical ports are used. Ltd. l One piece is configured for every FE/STM-1 (only configured for Ver. QWMP0000GE00 Optical Fiber(GE) - l It needs to be configured when GE optical ports are used.. 104 . l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1).D cabinets).D cabinets). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l One piece is configured for every GE (only configured for Ver. Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP000JMP00 Top Jumper Cable Unit for RFU - l Each antenna is configured with one package when the base station uses RFUs. Ltd. QWMP000JMP03 Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU - l Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package of the jumpers. Installation Packages for BBU Interconnection The following table lists installation packages for BBU interconnection of 3900series base stations.. the number of antennas to be configured is twice of that used in other scenarios. which are used in common areas. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which are used in cold areas. l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1). l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP000JMP02 Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU - l Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package of the jumpers. NOTE (1) When 4-way receive diversity is used. 105 . . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0 m 1 Optional. This package is required for BBU interconnection by using the UMPTs. QWECUMPTIC02 UMPT Interconnection Cable. This package is required for BBU interconnection by using the UMPTs. WD5PUCIUIM01 UCIU Interconnecting Materials (Internal Cabinet) 1 Optional for the BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ DBS3900. 5. 2. This package is used when two BBUs are installed in the same cabinet.0 m 1 Optional. Ltd. This package is used when the BBUs are installed in different cabinets.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5PUCIUIM00 UCIU Interconnecting Materials (Internal Cabinet) 1 Optional for the BTS3900L/ BTS3900AL. QWECUMPTIC05 UMPT Interconnection Cable. This package is required when BBUs are interconnected using UCIUs. This package is required when BBUs are interconnected using UCIUs. RRU Virtual Installation Packages The following table lists the RRU virtual installation packages. 106 . which includes the RRU power cable. RRU fiber optical cable. B - l Optional. and RRU3222. RRU3201. and CPRI optical module. Different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables. RRU3804. RRU3008. QWMPRRUINS02 RRU Installation Materials. RRU3808. l It is used for the following RRUs: RRU3004. l Each RRU is configured with one package. 107 . Different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMPRRUINS01 RRU Installation Materials - QWMPRRUINS04 RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode) - l Optional. RU3801E. l These packages are required for the RRU3908/ RRU3928/ RRU3929/ RRU3828/ RRU3829/ RRU3926 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. RRU3203. Ltd. RRU3220.. RRU3806. 108 . Different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables. Ltd. l Each RRU3240/ RRU3942/ RRU3841 is configured with one package.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity QWMPRRUINS05 RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode) - RRU Installation Materials - QWMPRRUINS03 Configuration Principle providing a 2. l Each RRU is configured with one package. l Optional. l Each RRU other than the preceding is configured with Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which includes the RRU power cable.9 Gbit/s is supported.5 Gbit/s CPRI port. and CPRI optical module. RRU fiber optical cable. A maximum CPRI data rate of 4.. . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.9 Gbit/s CPRI data rate. 109 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity QWMPRRUINS06 RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode) - Configuration Principle one package when the RRU uses a 4. RRU Power Cable Installation Package The following table lists the RRU power cable installation packages. QW7PAAUCAP01 RU Cable Package for AAU (≤ 100 m) - Optional. Each DC RRU3936/ RRU3824/ RRU3826/ RRU3838/ RRU3832/ RRU3268/ RRU3260/ RRU3938/ RRU3939/ RRU3839 is configured with one package. 110 . which includes DC RRU power cables and PGND cables. QW7PRRUCAP00 RRU Cable Package (≤ 100 m) - l Optional. Each RRU is configured with one package. Ltd. RRU Cable Package (≤ 50 m) 1 l Optional. l This package applies to the BTS3900AL. l This package applies to the BTS3900/ BTS3900L/ BTS3900A/ DBS3900. Each RU is configured with one package.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QW7PRRUCAP01 DBS3900.. which includes the DC RU power cable and ground cable. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. RRU CPRI Installation Material Package The CPRI optical transmission material packages apply to an RRU3936/RRU3824/RRU3826/ RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3268/RRU3260/RRU3938/RRU3939/RRU3839 and RU3260/ RU3268/RU3832. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference l The 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI optical transmission material package for RRUs. CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2.9 Gbit/ s) (Single Mode) - l Optional. Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5P25CPRI02 DBS3900.5 Gbit/ s) (Single Mode) - l Optional.9 Gbit/s CPRI installation material package is optionally configured according to the application scenario and port rate of an RRU/RU. This package applies to a BTS3900/ BTS3900L/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900AL/ DBS3900. CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2.5 Gbit/ s) - WD5P25CPRI01 BTS3900AL.9 Gbit/ s) - WD5P49CPRI01 BTS3900AL. l The multimode or single-mode material package is configured according to the type of the CPRI fiber optic cable. l Each RRU CPRI port is configured with one package when the CPRI port uses a 4. 111 . CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9 Gbit/s CPRI optical transmission material package for RRUs. 4. Ltd. The following table lists the RRU CPRI installation material packages. This package applies to a BTS3900/ BTS3900L/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900AL/ DBS3900.5 Gbit/s data rate. l Each RRU CPRI port is configured with one package when the CPRI port uses a 2. CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9 Gbit/s data rate.. WD5P49CPRI02 DBS3900. 2.5 Gbit/s or 4. Each package includes one fiber optic cable and two optical modules. CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4. Each package includes one fiber optic cable and two optical modules. CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.. 9. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which support a maximum rate of 4.9 Gbit/s) (Single Mode) - One package is configured for each AAU3902 that uses single-mode optical modules. l This package includes two optical modules and one optical fiber cable. Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle LT1PCOTMDC00 CPRI Optical Transmission Materials(Singlemode. WD5P49CPRI02 DBS3900.9 Gbit/s) - One package is configured for each AAU3902 that uses multimode optical modules. 112 .8 Gbit/s) - l Each RHUB3908 is configured with one package when it is connected to the BBU or another RHUB3908. which support a maximum rate of 4.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference AAU3902 Auxiliary Installation Materials The following table lists the AAU3902 auxiliary installation materials. WD5P49CPRI01 BTS3900AL. Installation Materials for Lampsite The following table lists the auxiliary material packages for Lampsite installation. Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle QW7PAAUCAP00 AAU Power Cable Package (≤ 100 m) - One package is configured for each AAU3902.9 Gbit/s. Ltd. The quoted items include the AAU3902 power cable and ground cable.9 Gbit/s. 113 . one package is configured for each pRRU3901 when the LTE carrier bandwidth configured for the RRU does not exceed 10 MHz but two packages are configured when the LTE carrier bandwidth configured for the RRU exceeds 10 MHz.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle QWHENTCBIN00 Ethernet Cable (Indoor) - l Each single-mode pRRU3901 is configured with one package.D Providing Power for 15 RRUs Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle QWMPODMINS00 ODM Installation Materials 1 l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 configured with an APM30 Ver.. l For UL dual-mode PRRU3901. Ltd. The longest Ethernet cable is 100 m. l The maximum power configuration of 15 RRUs is as follows: 12RRUs (2x60 W)+3RRUs (2x40 W). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. one set of mount kit. l This package includes one ODM. l The package includes the POE Ethernet cable and installation package. and installation auxiliaries. Materials for a Base Station with an APM30 Ver.D when the number of RRUs is greater than 12. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l This package includes one OFD and one piece of 12core multimode optical cable. l This package includes one OFD and one piece of 12core multimode optical cable.D when the number of optical fiber cables configured for RRUs is greater than 21. l This package is configured when the multimode CPRI optical fiber cable is required.D when the number of optical fiber cables configured for RRUs is greater than 21. Site Installation Material Package The following table lists the site installation packages.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle QWMPOFDOFM00 OFD and Optical Fiber(Multi-mode) 1 l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 configured with an APM30 Ver. 114 . QWMPOFDOFS00 OFD and Optical Fiber(Single mode) 1 l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 configured with an APM30 Ver. l This package is configured when the multimode CPRI optical fiber cable is required.. auxiliary cables.. Ltd. which includes the base.D). Site installation material package for the BTS3900 (Ver. 115 . QWMP0INSMT20 Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver. Site installation material package for the BTS3900 (Ver.B 1 l Optional.B).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-60 Installation Material Package for a Macro Base Station Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5P0INSMT00 Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver. l Each site must be configured with one package. and low-value installation materials. which includes the base. which includes the base.D 2 l Optional. l Each site must be configured with one package. Site installation material package for the BTS3900 (Ver. QWMP0INSMT06 Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver.C).C 1 l Optional. auxiliary cables. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. auxiliary cables.D) site is configured with one package. l Each BTS3900 (Ver. and low-value installation materials. and low-value installation materials. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package. and low-value installation materials. which includes the base. l Each BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet of 220 V AC.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0INSMT24 Installation Materials for BTS3900 (Ver. Site installation material package for a BTS3900 (Ver. auxiliary cables. Ltd. 116 . Site installation material package for the BTS3900L (Ver..D) cabinet of 220 V AC must be configured with one package. which includes the base. and low-value installation materials.D. QWMP0INSMT05 Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver.B). auxiliary cables.B 1 l Optional. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 220 V) 2 l Optional. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. auxiliary cables.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0INSMT07 Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package. 117 . l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package. and low-value installation materials.C).D 1 l Optional. auxiliary cables. QWMP0INSMT10 Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver. Site installation material package for the BTS3900L (Ver. and low-value installation materials.C 1 l Optional.. which includes the base. which includes the base.D) cabinet. Configured for the BTS3900L (Ver. and low-value installation materials.D.D) cabinet of 220 V AC. which includes the base.. Site installation material package for a BTS3900L (Ver.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0INSMT25 Installation Materials for BTS3900L (Ver. which includes the base. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 118 .C) cabinet. l Each BTS3900L (Ver. and low-value installation materials.D) AC cabinet must be configured with one package. auxiliary cables. auxiliary cables. WD5P0INSMT01 Installation Materials for BTS3900A 1 l Optional. 220 V) 1 l Optional. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package. Ltd. Configured for the BTS3900A (Ver. D) cabinet. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package. auxiliary cables. -48VDC) 1 QWMP0INSMT23 Installation Materials for BTS3900A (Ver. l Optional.C) cabinet. and low-value installation materials. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package. 119 .C 1 l Optional. which includes the base. auxiliary cables.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0INSMT08 Installation Materials for BTS3900A Ver. QWMP0INSMT22 Installation Materials for BTS3900A (Ver. Configured for the BTS3900AL cabinet. which includes the base.D. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package. and low-value installation materials. and low-value installation materials..D. which includes the base. Ltd. Configured for the BTS3900A (Ver. Configured for the BTS3900A (Ver. 220 V/110 V AC) 1 WD5P0INSMT09 Installation Materials for BTS3900AL 1 l Optional. auxiliary cables. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0INSMT03 Installation Materials for DBS3900 1 Each site configured with RFUs and RRUs needs to be configured with one package. Four E1s are configured with one piece. 4 E1. OMB Ver. which includes the auxiliary cables and low-value installation auxiliary materials. QWMP0INSMT09 OMB Cabinet Installation Materials (Ver. C AC cabinet installation material package. which includes the related cables and low-value installation auxiliary materials..C. DC) 1 Optional.C DC cabinet is configured with one package.C AC cabinet is configured with one package.C. AC) 1 Optional. Table 4-61 Site Installation Material Package for a DBS3900 Cabinet Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle WD5P0INSMT03 Installation Materials for DBS3900 1 A site where a distributed base station is deployed is configured with one package. 120 . Table 4-62 BTS3900C Installation Auxiliary Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0004E100 Trunk Cable (75 ohm. OMB Ver. QWMP0INSMT13 OMB Cabinet Installation Materials (Ver. Each OMB Ver. 10 m) - It needs to be configured when 75-ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is required. Ltd. C DC cabinet installation material package. Each OMB Ver. WD5P25CPRI10 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2. Multimode optical transmission material package for RRUs with 2.C cabinets. One package is configured for each 2. 4 E1. In the case of 4-way RX diversity or RRU working in back-up mode. QWMP000JMP03 Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU - Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package of the jumpers. FE/STM-1 optical fiber cables work with only BTS3900C Ver. which are used in common areas.C cabinets. QWMP000JMP02 Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU - Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package of the jumpers. Ltd. QWMP0000FE00 Ethernet Cable - When the FE/GE electrical port is used. QWMP0000GE00 Optical Fiber(GE) - One piece is configured for each GE optical port when the GE optical port is used.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle QWMP0004E101 Trunk Cable (120 ohm.5 Gbit/s CPRI port. which are used in cold areas. GE optical fiber cables work with only BTS3900C Ver.5 Gbit/s CPRI rate. each FE/GE is configured with one piece. the number of jumpers doubles. QWMP0000FE02 Optical Fiber (FE/ STM-1) - One piece is configured for each FE/STM-1 optical port when the FE/STM-1 optical port is used. Four E1s are configured with one piece.. which is optional. 121 . 10 m) - It needs to be configured when 120-ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is required. the number of jumpers doubles. In the case of 4-way RX diversity or RRU working in back-up mode.5 Gbit/s) - Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. site installation material package for a BTS3900C DC cabinet. Site installation material package for a BTS3900C AC cabinet. 122 .. Auxiliary Materials on the Site This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on the sites of 3900series base stations.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle WD5P49CPRI10 CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9 Gbit/s CPRI rate. One package must be configured for each BTS3900C DC cabinet. WD5PINSMTAC0 Installation Materials for BTS3900C AC Cabinet 1 Optional. WD2DGPSSAF01 GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System 1 One package is configured when the required GPS feeder is longer than 50 m and is shorter than or equal to 100 m. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BTS3900 or BTS3900L The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials for a BTS3900 or BTS3900L site. One package is configured for each 4. One package must be configured for each BTS3900C AC cabinet. WD5PINSMTDC0 Installation Materials for BTS3900C DC Cabinet 1 Optional. Ltd.9 Gbit/s) - Multimode optical transmission material package for RRUs with 4. which is optional. Table 4-63 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900 or BTS3900L site Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD2DGPSSAF00 GPS Antenna 1 One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.9 Gbit/s CPRI port. GM1X00IDDF02 Embedded DDF Box (120 ohm. it is recommended that each indoor site be configured with one piece. it is recommended that each indoor site be configured with one piece. 8 E1) - l If the 120 ohm DDF needs to be provided by Huawei. l Each package supports 8E1s. QW7PRRUCEP03 RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m) - Optional. 8 E1) - l If the 75 ohm DDF needs to be provided by Huawei. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and is shorter than 150 m. Ltd. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) QW7PRRUCEP02 RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m) - Optional. l Each package supports 8E1s. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package. 123 . The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and is shorter than 100 m.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle GM1X00IDDF01 Embedded DDF Box (75 ohm. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle E000ICL00 Indoor Cable Ladder (2. l A maximum of one package can be configured for each site. E000IGU00 Grounding Unit 2 l Each indoor site is configured with one ground bar. each site is configured with two ground bars. When the antenna is provided by Huawei.5 m) - This package is configured for site deployment according to the actual requirement. EFEDWID01 Thru-Wall Encapsuled Wiring Window l This package is configured for site deployment according to the actual requirement. This package is configured according to the requirements for a new base station.5 m) - This package is configured for site deployment according to the actual requirement. One package is configured for each outdoor site by default. WDCDBOX01 Outdoor Cable Ladder (2. Ltd. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Optional.. 124 . . l GM1E00IEMU0 1 is not required when this package is configured. QW7MEMUKIT01 Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors) 1 l One piece is configured if the environment (such as the liquid level. Configured for a site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs. 125 . Optional. l It can support 32 Boolean alarm inputs. and humidity) of the equipment room needs to be monitored. UKspecific. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GM1X0DNSPE01 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 WD2M00EEUM01 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle GM1E00IEMU01 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 One piece is configured for an indoor site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs. temperature. Ltd. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later. door status. smoke. 5 to 848 MHz).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER01 Anti-Interference Filter. l It is a dual-unit filter.9(824 to 846.2 dB (846. 898. DIN female.5 MHz). 856 to 860 MHz. 1.2 dB (891. 54 dB.9 dB(869 to 891. RX: 824 to 849 MHz. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. TX: 869 to 894 MHz. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. 1. Dual_band pass. 851 to 856 MHz. 0. 0. 1. Ltd. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850 MHz frequency. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 to 894 MHz). 126 . Outdoor.5 MHz).. double.9 dB(848 to 849 MHz).5 to 915 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. 869 to 878.1 dB. TX: 925 to 950 MHz. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. Outdoor. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880 to 905 MHz.4 dB. RX: 2. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA. Ltd. 127 . 7/16 DIN female.5 MHz. dual_band pass filter. 40 dB. l It is a dual-unit filter.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER02 Anti-Interference Filter. double unit. RX: 880 to 905 MHz. GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band.. TX: 0. TX: 925 to 950 MHz. . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l It is a dual-unit filter. TX: 930 to 955 MHz. 128 . Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. dual_band pass filter. GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. Ltd.1 dB.5 MHz. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885 to 910 MHz.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER03 Anti-Interference Filter.4 dB. RX: 885 to 910 MHz. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. Outdoor. double unit. 869 to 883. TX: 930 to 955 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA. RX: 2. TX: 0. 7/16 DIN female. 40 dB. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. TX: 935 to 960 MHz.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description AANTIFLTER04 Anti-Interference Filter. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. double unit.5 MHz. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.. RX: 2. 40 dB. 869 to 888. 7/16 DIN female. dual_band pass filter. DC Pass Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA.4 dB. 129 . It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895. TX: 940 to 960 MHz. TX:0.1 dB. GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. Outdoor. RX: 890 to 915 MHz.8 to 915 MHz. l It is a dual-unit filter. Ltd. 8 to 915 MHz. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. 7/16 DIN female. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895. dual_band pass filter. TX: 940 to 960 MHz. GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band.4 dB.7 dB. 130 . l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA. double unit. Outdoor. Ltd. RX: 1.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER05 Anti-Interference Filter. l It is a dual-unit filter. RX: 895. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.8 to 915 MHz. TX: 0.. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. 869 to 894 MHz. 40 dB. TX: 940 to 960MHz. or BTS3900C site Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD2DGPSSAF00 GPS Antenna 1 One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required. BTS3900A or BTS3900AL The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials for a BTS3900A or BTS3900AL site. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. GU - l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. WD2DGPSSAF01 GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System 1 One package is configured when the required GPS feeder is longer than 50 m and is shorter than or equal to 100 m. Table 4-64 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900A. 131 . BTS3900AL. l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle ATMAKIT00 TMA(No AISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (TMA not included). An auxiliary installation material package must be configured for each antiinterference filter.. this item must be manually removed from the quotation list. 8 E1) 1 Optional. 8 E1) 1 Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and is shorter than 100 m. WDCDBOX01 Outdoor Cable Ladder (2. Ltd. One package is configured for a new outdoor macro base station.. One package is configured for a new outdoor macro base station. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package. QW7PRRUCEP03 RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m) - Optional. 132 . The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and is shorter than 150 m. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QW7P00EDDF00 Embedded DDF Box (75 ohm.5 m) 1 Optional. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package. It is configured according to the requirements for a new distributed base station. QW7PRRUCEP02 RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m) - Optional. E00EDDF02 Embedded DDF Box (120 ohm. WD2M00EEUM00 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 GM1X0DNSPE00 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 Optional. UKspecific. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. GM1X0DNSPE01 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 WD2M00EEUM01 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later. One package is configured for each outdoor site by default. This package is configured according to the requirements for a new base station. Configured in an outdoor macro base station when 17 to 32 Boolean alarms are required. Configured for a site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle E000IGU00 Grounding Unit 1 Optional. 133 . GM5X00SLPU00 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (1 to 16 Boolean Alarm) 1 It is configured for an outdoor macro base station that needs to collect 1 to 16 Boolean alarm inputs. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later. Optional. Ltd.. l Each BTS3900AL is delivery with one OAP800 by default. OAP800. By default. used for installing a BTS3900AL cabinet on outdoor steel rails. one OAP600 is configured for each RFC. The OAP600 is configured in outdoor scenarios with rails.. either a stacked cabinet or a standalone RFC. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The distance between rails can be adjusted from 535 mm to 750 mm. which is optional. Its depth ranges from 500 mm to 750 mm. WD2K000EIK02 Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (Width 800 mm) - Optional. Ltd. 134 . l The OAP800's width ranges from 480 mm to 780 mm.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD2K000EIK01 Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (Width 600 mm) - Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (OAP600) for a cabinet used by the BTS3900A. Outdoor. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.5 MHz).9(824 to 846. 0. 851 to 856 MHz. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. 898.5 to 915 MHz.2 dB (846. 1. 0.9 dB(848 to 849 MHz).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER01 Anti-Interference Filter. RX: 824 to 849 MHz. double. 54 dB.2 dB (891.9 dB(869 to 891. DIN female. TX: 869 to 894 MHz. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850MHz frequency.5 MHz). Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. 1. 135 ..5 to 848 MHz). l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter.5 to 894 MHz). 1. Dual_band pass. 856 to 860 MHz. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER02 Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER03 Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz, 869 to 883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description AANTIFLTER04 Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935 to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX:0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER05 Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960MHz, 869 to 894 MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle ATMAKIT00 TMA(No AISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (TMA not included), GU - l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. An auxiliary installation material package must be configured for each antiinterference filter. l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally, this item must be manually removed from the quotation list. DBS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900 site. Table 4-65 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900 site Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD2DGPSSAF00 GPS Antenna 1 One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required. WD2DGPSSAF01 GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System 1 One package is configured when the required GPS feeder is longer than 50 m and is shorter than or equal to 100 m. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QW7P00EDDF00 Embedded DDF Box (75 ohm, 8 E1) 1 Optional. One package is configured for each newly deployed distributed base station. E00EDDF02 Embedded DDF Box (120 ohm, 8 E1) 1 Optional. One package is configured for each newly deployed distributed base station. E000IGU00 Grounding Unit 2 l Each indoor site is configured with one ground bar. When the antenna is provided by Huawei, each site is configured with two ground bars. l Each site is configured with one or two pieces if needed. QW7PRRUCEP02 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m) - Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and is shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package. 141 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle QW7PRRUCEP03 RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m) - Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and is shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package. E000ICL00 Indoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m) - Optional. The package is configured as required if the BBU is installed indoors in a new distributed base station. WDCDBOX01 Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m) - Optional. It is configured according to the requirements for a new distributed base station. GM5X00SLPU00 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (1 to 16 Boolean Alarm) 1 It is optionally configured for a distributed base station when the BBU is installed outdoors and there are 1 to 16 Boolean alarm inputs. WD2M00EEUM00 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 It is optionally configured when the BBU is installed outdoors in a distributed base station and 16 to 32 Boolean inputs need be monitored. It is also optional configured when 1 to 16 Boolean inputs need be monitored for a +24 V Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle GM1X0DNSPE00 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 distributed base station. QW7MEEMUKIT0 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors) 1 QW1XEMEUWS00 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors) 1 The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later. Optional. Configured when the BBU is installed indoors and the environment (such as the liquid level, smoke, door status, and temperature and humidity) in the equipment room needs to be monitored. It can support 32 Boolean alarm inputs. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GM1X0DNSPE01 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 WD2M00EEUM01 Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Optional, UKspecific. Configured for a site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later. 143 l It is a dual-unit filter. 0.2 dB (846. 1. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850MHz frequency. 1. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. RX: 824 to 849 MHz.9 dB(869 to 891.5 to 894 MHz). Ltd.9(824 to 846. 0.. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. DIN female. 856 to 860 MHz.5 to 915 MHz. 898. TX: 869 to 894 MHz. 54 dB. Dual_band pass.5 MHz).5 MHz). 851 to 856 MHz. Outdoor. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band.2 dB (891.5 to 848 MHz).9 dB(848 to 849 MHz). 144 . double.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER01 Anti-Interference Filter. 1. 1 dB. Ltd. dual_band pass filter. GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band.5 MHz. double unit. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. l It is a dual-unit filter. TX: 925 to 950 MHz.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER02 Anti-Interference Filter. RX: 2. RX: 880 to 905 MHz. Outdoor.. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880 to 905 MHz. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency.4 dB. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA. 869 to 878. 7/16 DIN female. TX: 925 to 950 MHz. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. TX: 0. 40 dB. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 145 . TX: 0. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA. 869 to 883.4 dB. double unit. TX: 930 to 955 MHz. RX: 885 to 910 MHz. Ltd.1 dB. TX: 930 to 955 MHz.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER03 Anti-Interference Filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. Outdoor.5 MHz. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885 to 910 MHz.. 40 dB. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. 146 . 7/16 DIN female. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. RX: 2. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. dual_band pass filter. DC Pass Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency.1 dB.. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895. RX: 890 to 915 MHz. dual_band pass filter.8 to 915 MHz. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. 40 dB. l It is a dual-unit filter. 147 . double unit. TX:0. 869 to 888. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description AANTIFLTER04 Anti-Interference Filter. Outdoor. TX: 935 to 960 MHz.4 dB. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TX: 940 to 960 MHz.5 MHz. 7/16 DIN female. GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. RX: 2. Ltd. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle AANTIFLTER05 Anti-Interference Filter.8 to 915 MHz. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter. TX: 940 to 960 MHz. TX: 940 to 960MHz.7 dB. double unit. Outdoor. RX: 1. l It is a dual-unit filter. and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. TX: 0. 869 to 894 MHz. Ltd.4 dB. DC Pass - l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. 148 . GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. dual_band pass filter.. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7/16 DIN female. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA.8 to 915 MHz. 40 dB. RX: 895. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895. . Ltd. This package is configured according to the requirements for a new base station. One package is configured for each outdoor site by default.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle ATMAKIT00 TMA(No AISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (TMA not included). l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally. WD2DGPSSAF00 GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System 1 One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required. An auxiliary installation material package must be configured for each antiinterference filter. this item must be manually removed from the quotation list. 149 . BTS3900C The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C site. GU - l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 4-66 Auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C site Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle E000IGU00 Grounding Unit 1 Optional. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Maximu m Quantity Configuration Principle WD2DGPSSAF01 GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System 1 One package is configured when the required GPS feeder is longer than 50 m and is shorter than or equal to 100 m. One TRX of a DRFU license is configured for each excess TRX. Table 4-67 Hardware license configuration for GSM base stations Issue 06 (2014-03-26) External Model License Package Descripti on Function Configuration Principle GMMS0 DRFUT0 0 3900 series DRFU transceiver (per TRX) License for the Each DRFU provides one TRX by default. One license is configured for each excess TRX. The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base stations. Hardware License Configuration of GSM Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base stations.3. It applies to GRFUs.. It applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.5 Hardware License Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for each type of base station. the module needs to be configured with one license. GMMS0 GRFUT0 0 3900 series GRFU transceiver (per TRX) License for providing multiple TRXs for a GRFU Each GRFU provides one TRX by default. in GSM mode It applies to DRFUs. 4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. WDMS MULTIT 00 GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module License for the second GSM TRX of a multimode RF module Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by default. Ltd. 150 . To enable a multimode RF module to provide two GSM TRXs. . GMMSM C60HP00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License (per TRX) Each TRX of a multi-carrier module supports 60 W transmit power. the Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License is supported. GMMS0 GRRUT0 0 3900 series RRU3008 transceiver (per TRX) RRU3008 multiTRX license Each RRU3008 supports one TRX by default. This license applies to multimode RRUs. 151 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model License Package Descripti on Function Configuration Principle WDMS MULTIT 01 GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module License for multiple GSM TRXs of a multimode RF module When a multimode module is configured with more than two GSM TRXs. An RRU3004 that supports two carriers requires a double-transceiver license. The number of multi-TRX licenses is one less than the number of TRXs supported by an RRU3008. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two GSM TRXs. WDMS MULTIT 00 GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module License for the second GSM TRX of a multimode RF module Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by default. For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 60 W. the number of licenses to be configured for the module is the total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module minus 2. This license is configured when a multimode module is configured with more than two GSM TRXs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It applies to multimode RRUs. The number of licenses to be configured for the module is the total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module minus 2. One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 60 W and is smaller than 80 W. GMMS0 DRRUT0 0 3900 series RRU3004 transceiver (per TRX) RRU3004 dual transceiver license Each RRU3004 supports one TRX by default. the module needs to be configured with one license. Ltd. GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module License for multiple GSM TRXs of a multimode RF module WDMS MULTIT 01 This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs. This package does not contain the license package of Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX). Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AA U (per TRX) Each TRX of a multi-TRX module (AAU or blade RRU) supports 60 W transmit power. GSM Multiple Transceiver for MultiMode Blade&AA U License for multiple GSM TRXs of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU) This license is configured when a multimode module is configured with more than two GSM TRXs. One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 80 W. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU. the Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License is supported. The number of licenses to be configured for the module is two less than the total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two GSM TRXs.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) External Model License Package Descripti on Function Configuration Principle GMMSM C80HP00 Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License (per TRX) Each TRX of a multi-carrier module supports 80 W transmit power. Ltd. the module needs to be configured with one license. WDMS MULTIT 03 WDMS MULTIT 02 GMMSM C60HP01 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 80 W. 152 . This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU. One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 60 W and is smaller than 80 W. GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Blade&AA U License for the second GSM TRX of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU) Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by default. . The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base stations. Ltd. A maximum four licenses can be configured. l Four licenses are configured when more than 64 CEs are required. the Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License is supported. 153 . A maximum four licenses can be configured. For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 80 W. Each license supports 16 CEs. Table 4-68 Hardware license configuration of UMTS base stations Model License Package Description Function Configuration Principle QWMS00 0UCE01 UL CE License for 0 CEs to 64 CEs (per 16 CEs) This license is configured for the UMTS mode. This package does not contain the license package of Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model License Package Descripti on Function Configuration Principle GMMSM C80HP01 Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License for Blade&AA U (per TRX) Each TRX of a multi-TRX module (AAU or blade RRU) supports 80 W transmit power. One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 80 W. A maximum four licenses can be configured. It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Each license supports 16 CEs. This license applies only to AAUs and blade RRUs. It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs. QWMS00 0UCE02 QWMS00 0UCE03 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) UL CE License for 64 CEs to 128 CEs (per 16 CEs) UL CE License for 128 CEs to 192 CEs (per 16 CEs) l It is configured when less than or equal to 64 CEs are required. Hardware License Configuration of UMTS Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base stations. It is used for uplink CEs and quoted in a step-wise manner. Each license supports 16 CEs. Ltd. the maximum number of HSDPA codes that can be configured equals the number of cells carried by the base station multiplied by 15.. The number of HSDPA codes required by a base station must be a multiple of 5. DL CE License for more than 192 CEs (per 16 CEs) Each license supports 16 CEs. l It is configured when less than or equal to 64 CEs are required. A maximum four licenses can be configured. HSDPA code resources This is a mandatory HSDPA function item. A maximum four licenses can be configured. It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs. l Four licenses are configured when more than 64 CEs are required. A maximum four licenses can be configured. Each package is one HSDPA code. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Each license supports 16 CEs. This license is configured for the UMTS mode. HSDPA Code (per Code) It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs. It is configured when more than 192 CEs are required. It is configured when more than 192 CEs are required. Each license supports 16 CEs. This item must be configured based on the quantity of the HSDPA code resources required by the base station.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model License Package Description QWMS00 0UCE04 UL CE License for more than 192 CEs (per 16 CEs) QWMS00 0DCE01 QWMS00 0DCE02 QWMS00 0DCE03 QWMS00 0DCE04 QWMS0H DPAC00 DL CE License for 0 CEs to 64 CEs (per 16 CEs) DL CE License for 64 CEs to 128 CEs (per 16 CEs) Function Configuration Principle Each license supports 16 CEs. The minimum configuration is five HSDPA codes. For a base station. A maximum four licenses can be configured. DL CE License for 128 CEs to 192 CEs (per 16 CEs) Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured. It is used for downlink CEs and quoted in a step-wise manner. 154 . one package needs to be configured for each excess carrier. It is configured when the signaling capacity of a base station exceeds 350 CNBAP/s. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU. When the module has more than one carrier. one license is configured for each of the second to fourth UMTS carriers of each module. and RRU in UMTS mode.0/ RAN14. This license applies to the WRFU. one package needs to be configured for each excess carrier. This license is supported from SRAN7. UMTS NodeB Signaling Capacity License (per 50 CNBAP/s) UMTS signaling capacity license Multi Carrier License for Blade&AAU (per Carrier) Multi-carrier function for the UMTS mode of an AAU or blade RRU WDMS00 0MCA01 QWMS00 UNSC00 QWMS00 0MCA01 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) This license applies to multimode RF modules. Therefore.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model License Package Description Function Configuration Principle QWMS00 0MCA00 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) Multi-carrier function for the UMTS mode A license for one carrier is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. Ltd. WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) License for multiple UMTS carriers of a multimode RF module The quotation of a multimode RF module does not include a license for UMTS carriers. QWMS00 00PA00 Power License (per 20 W) License package for 20 W power A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the module has more than one carrier. WDMS00 0MCA00 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) License for the first carrier of the UMTS mode in a multimode RF module The quotation of a multimode RF module does not include a license for UMTS carriers. Each license contains a signaling capacity of 50 CNBAP/s. 155 . When the power exceeds 20 W. This license applies to multimode RF modules.. Therefore. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0 onwards. one license is configured for the first UMTS carrier of each module. A license for one carrier is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. WRFUd. one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power. When the power exceeds 20 W.. Hardware License Configuration of LTE Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base stations. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model License Package Description Function Configuration Principle QWMS00 00PA01 Power License for Blade&AAU (per 20 W) License package for 20 W power of an AAU or blade RRU A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W. one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power. Table 4-69 Hardware license configuration for LTE base stations Issue 06 (2014-03-26) External Model License Package Descriptio n Function Configuration Principle LT1S000 0PA00 RF Output Power (per 20 W) Power license package for RF modules A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. One license is required for each UMTS carrier. The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base stations. It is configured for the second to fourth carriers for each multimode module. WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Blade&AAU (per Carrier) License for multiple UMTS carriers of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU) The license package for each UMTS carrier is not included in a multimode module. One license is required for each UMTS carrier. but configured for the first UMTS carrier of each multimode module. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. WDMS00 0MCA03 WDMS00 0MCA02 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Blade&AAU (per Carrier) License for the first UMTS carrier of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU) The license package for each UMTS carrier is not included in a multimode module. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU. 156 . This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. It applies to RF modules with multiple carriers. one license is configured for the cell. 157 . Ltd. one package is configured for every additional carrier. l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth. one license is configured for the cell. one license is configured for the cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. one license is configured for the cell. Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth. LT1S010 MHZ00 Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth. one license is configured for the cell. one license is configured for the cell. This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs. l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth. LT1S005 MHZ00 Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz Capacity Carrier Bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules l When a cell uses less than or equal to 5 MHz bandwidth.. one license is configured for the cell.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model License Package Descriptio n Function Configuration Principle LT1S000 MCA00 LTE Multi Carrier (per Carrier) Multi-carrier license package for RF modules The quotation for each RF module includes one carrier by default. one license is configured for the cell. one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth. This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs. l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth. l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth. When more than one carrier is used by an RF module. LT1S015 MHZ00 LT1S020 MHZ00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth. l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth. one license is configured for the cell. For example. a S1/1/1 base station is configured with a minimum of 18 (equal to 3x6) RRC_connected users. Each cell is configured with the licenses for a minimum of 6 RRC_connected users. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. License for the throughput capacity of the baseband processing module (per Mbit/s) This package is configured based on the network plan. 158 . This package applies only to the LBBPd. The maximum capacity is 750 Mbit/s. and the capacity increases with a step of 5 Mbit/s.. The total number of packages is the sum of the calculation results. l 5 MHz: N is 25. l 20 MHz: N is 100.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model License Package Descriptio n Function Configuration Principle LT1S0AC TUS00 RRC connected User License for the baseband processing capacity of RRC_connect ed users (per RRC_connect ed user) This package is configured based on the network plan. The total number of packages equals N multiplied by the number of cells. A maximum of 5400 RRC_connected users are allowed. and the number of RRC_connected users increases with a step of 6. l 3 MHz: N is 15. l 15 MHz: N is 75. N is determined by the cell bandwidth as follows: LT1S0TH ROU00 LT1S000 0RB00 Throughput Capacity Resource Block For example.4 MHz: N is 6. l 10 MHz: N is 50. In multi-carrier scenarios. Resource Block (per RB) Assume that N specifies the number of required packages per cell. the number of required packages is calculated on a per-carrier basis. Each cell is configured with a minimum of 5 Mbit/s. Ltd. l 1. a S1/1/1 base station is configured with a minimum of 15 Mbit/s (equal to 3 x 5 Mbit/s). Each baseband board has been configured with two receive channels per cell.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model License Package Descriptio n Function Configuration Principle LT1S00B BTC00 BB Transmit Channel BB Transmit Channel (per Channel) This package is configured when the LBBPd2 requires more than two transmit channels. The number of required packages is calculated using the following formula: Number of packages required for one LBBPd2 = Number of sectors with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels . The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels of a single RRU . one package is required for each transmit channel added. LT1S00B BRC00 BB Receive Channel BB Receive Channel (per Channel) This package is configured when the LBBPd2 requires more than two transmit channels. and UBBPd6.. LT1S00R FTC00 RF Transmit Channel RF Transmit Channel(per Channel) This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF receive channels.2) x Number of carriers This license only applies to the LBBPc. 159 . This package applies only to the RF modules with four transmit channels (4T RF modules). Ltd. Therefore. LBBPd2. one package is required for every receive channel added. UBBPd4. The quotation for an LBBPd2 includes two transmit channels per cell. and UBBPd6. UBBPd5.2) x Number of carriers This license only applies to the LBBPc.2) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the number of transmit channels exceeds 2. UBBPd4. Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. The number of required packages is calculated using the following formula: Number of packages required for one LBBPd2 = Number of sectors with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels . LBBPd2. UBBPd5. Add this package for each extra RF transmit channel of an RF module. Ltd. Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz for Blade&AA U Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU When a cell uses 10 MHz. When more than one carrier is used by an RF module. 15 MHz. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. 15 MHz. or 20 MHz bandwidth. Each RF module has two RF receive channels. or less than or equal to 5 MHz bandwidth. one license is configured for the cell.. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.2) LT1S000 0PA01 RF Output Power Blade&AA U (per 20 W) Power license package for an AAU or blade RRU A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels of a single RRU . one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power. one license is configured for the cell. 20 MHz. Add this package for each extra RF receive channel on an RF module. 160 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the power exceeds 20 W. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. one package is configured for every additional carrier. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz for Blade&AA U Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU When a cell uses 10 MHz.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model License Package Descriptio n Function Configuration Principle LT1S00R FRC00 RF Receive Channel RF Receive Channel (per Channel) This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF receive channels. LT1S000 MCA01 LT1S005 MHZ01 LT1S010 MHZ01 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) RF multi carrier for blade&AA U (per carrier) Multi-carrier license package for an AAU or blade RRU The quotation for each RF module includes one carrier by default. This package applies only to the RF modules with four receive channels (4R RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels of a single RRU .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model License Package Descriptio n Function Configuration Principle LT1S015 MHZ01 Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz for Blade&AA U Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU When a cell uses 15 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth. Add this package for each extra RF transmit channel of an RF module. Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. LT1S020 MHZ01 LT1S00R FTC01 This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. When the number of RF receive channels exceeds 2. Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz for Blade&AA U Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth. This package applies only to the RF modules with four transmit channels (4T RF modules). Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This package applies only to the RF modules with four receive channels (4R RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels of a single RRU .2) This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. LT1S00R FRC01 RF Receive Channel for Blade&AA U Blade&AAU RF Receive Channel (per Channel) This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF transmit channels. one license is configured for the cell. one package is required for each added receive channel. one license is configured for the cell. RF Transmit Channel for Blade&AA U Blade&AAU RF Transmit Channel(per Channel) This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF transmit channels. 161 .. Ltd.2) This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. Each RF module has two RF receive channels. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. co-MPT licenses. License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring hardware licenses. UBBPd4. The BBU3900 supports hybrid configuration of the LBBPc. WDMS00 GLDM01 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. LBBPd1. the power of each module is the product of the number of MIMO channels and the output power of each channel. LBBPd3.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference NOTE In MIMO scenarios. GSM/LTE Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector) GL dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU In GL dual mode. UBBPd3. 162 . WDMS00 GLDM00 RF GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) Dual-mode license for GL RF modules One package is configured for each sector served by a GL RF module. one package is configured for each sector. and UBBPd6. UBBPd5. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. Table 4-70 Principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base stations External Model License Package Description Function Configuration Principle WDMS00 GUDM00 RF GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) Dual-mode license for GU RF modules One package is configured for each sector served by a GU RF module. one package is configured for each sector. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l 2x2 MIMO (2x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels. l 4x2 MIMO (4x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels. LBBPd2. WDMS00 ULDM00 RF UMTS/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) Dual-mode license for UL RF modules One package is configured for each sector served by a UL RF module. and co-BBP licenses for multimode base stations. Ltd. WDMS00 GUDM01 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector) GU dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU In GU dual mode. For example: l 2x2 MIMO (2x30 W): Each RRU requires 60 W power and is configured with two RF channels.. Hardware License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base stations. The GSM.. 163 . Co-MPT License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the principles for configuring the co-MPT licenses for multimode base stations. WDMS0 UMMU0 0 MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS) (Per UMPT) Co-MPT license for UMTS Configure this package based on the number of UMTS base stations supported by each UMPT(1). one package is configured for each sector. first quote a UMPT for the earliest mode and then add licenses for later modes. When multiple modes are configured for a UMPT. One license needs to be added for each additional mode. NOTE (1) Each UMPT supports one mode by default. Table 4-71 Co-MPT license configuration for multimode base stations Model License Package Description Function Configuration Principle WDMS0 UMMG0 0 MPT Multi Mode license (GSM) (Per UMPT) Co-MPT license for GSM Configure this package based on the number of GSM base stations supported by each UMPT(1). This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license. Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license. UMTS. WDMS0 UMML00 MPT Multi Mode license (LTE FDD) (Per UMPT) Co-MPT license for LTE Configure this package based on the number of LTE base stations supported by each UMPT(1). and LTE modes are arranged from the earliest to the latest as follows: GSM < UMTS < LTE Co-BBP License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base stations. Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference External Model License Package Description Function Configuration Principle WDMS00 ULDM01 UMTS/LTE Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector) UL dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU For a UL dual-mode base station. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. . 164 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. WDMS00UFMU00 UBBP First-Mode license (UMTS) (per UBBP) License for the first mode (UMTS) of the UBBPa One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses UMTS as its first mode. WDMS00UMMU00 UBBP Multi-Mode license (UMTS (per UBBP) License for adding a new mode (UMTS) of the UBBPa One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which UMTS is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode). Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-72 Configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base stations Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Model License Package Description Function Configuration Principle WDMS00UFMG00 UBBP First-Mode license (GSM) (per UBBP) License for the first mode (GSM) of the UBBPa One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses GSM as its first mode. WDMS00UMMG00 UBBP Multi-Mode license (GSM) (per UBBP) License for adding a new mode (GSM) of the UBBPa One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which GSM is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode). WDMS0UMMLF00 UBBP Multi-Mode license (LTE FDD) (per UBBP) License for adding a new mode (LTE FDD) of the UBBPa One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which LTE FDD is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode). WDMS0UFMLF00 UBBP First-Mode license (LTE FDD) (per UBBP) License for the first mode (LTE FDD) of the UBBPa One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses LTE FDD as its first mode. UMPTb. if licenses for multiple modes are purchased together. Table 4-73 Mapping between the board and product version in a Lampsite base station Product Version SRAN 9. and UBBPd LTE: LBBPd and UBBPd NOTE LTE FDD mode is configured with the LMPT only in base station conversion scenarios. and multimode concurrency with new mode added. Ltd. l A single BBU can support a maximum of 12 UMTS RF cells.4. (2) In newly deployed multimode sites. Restrictions on the BBU configurations in a Lampsite base station are as follows: l A single BBU can support a maximum of 18 LTE RF cells. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the UBBP Multi-Mode license corresponding to the newly added mode must be purchased. (3) In mode transition scenarios such as single mode to single mode. 4.. the license for a higher mode can be purchased with the license for a lower mode for free. single mode to multimode concurrency. the UMPT is delivered and the LMPT is not recommended. WBBPf. and LMPT Baseband Processin g Unit LBBPd and UBBPd UMTS UL Dual-Mode SeparateMPT Co-MPT UMPTa and UMPTb UMPTa and UMPTb UMPTb WBBPd.1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station In a Lampsite base station.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model License Package Description Function Configuration Principle (1) In newly deployed single-mode sites.0 Board Type LTE FDD Main Control Unit UMPTa. the license for the first mode (UBBP First-Mode license) must be quoted. The modes are arranged from the lowest to the highest as follows: GSM > UMTS > LTE FDD > LTE TDD. and UBBPd UMTS: WBBPf. The following table lists mapping between the board and product version in a Lampsite base station. 165 . In a newly deployed base station. WBBPd (providing only baseband resources). main control units and base band processing units in a BBU vary depending on product versions.4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station 4. 4. the RHUB can only be connected to the CPRI port on the baseband processing unit in slot 2 or 3 of the BBU using a single fiber optic cable.2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles The following figure shows the exterior of an RHUB3908. and the BBU must use the CPRI MUX feature. Figure 4-2 Exterior of an RHUB3908 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. one UMTS baseband processing unit and one LTE baseband processing unit need to be configured in the Lampsite base station. l In a macro+micro site. the WBBPd can only be used to provide UMTS baseband resources and cannot be used to provide CPRI optical ports.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference l In UL dual-mode scenarios. Ltd. l When the UBBPd is used. if the UBBPd is used as a multi-mode baseband processing unit in the macro base station. l If a Lampsite base station is deployed with UL modes. UMTS and LTE modes cannot be deployed on the same baseband processing unit in a Lampsite base station and must be separately deployed on different baseband processing units. 166 . The following table lists the RHUB3908 configuration principles.4.. 228 Gbit/s. PSU. Global) CPRI transmission signal combination unit of the pRRU Supports RF signal division and combination of the pRRU cell and supports CPRI data compression and decompression of various modes. 9.4576 Gbit/s. the RHUB needs to be delivered with AC power cables according to countries and areas. l The RHUB electrical port only supports the CPRI data rate of 1. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. WD6M1RBH2.. 24 A single BBU can be configured with a maximum of 24 RHUBs.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-74 RHUB3908 configurations Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD6M39RHU B00 RHUB3908. The following table lists the carrier configuration principles of the SRAN9. The basic HUB3908 configuration principles are as follows: l A single SRAN9. 2.9152 Gbit/s. The code applies to global markets except Japan. l The RHUB and BBU (or the RHUB and RHUB) can be connected in the single-star or chain topology.228 Gbit/s.0 BBU supports a maximum of 24 RHUBs. l The RHUB optical port supports a maximum rate of 9. 4. 167 .8 Gbit/s and supports adaptive switching among 1.8304 Gbit/s. Therefore.0 RHUB. Each RHUB can connect to a maximum of eight pRRUs. pRRU pool and PoE support (2xCPRI SFP. 8xCPRI OVER PHY with PSE. l The RHUB and pRRU are connected through the GE electrical port and support the singlechain topology and load sharing mode. The RHUB supports a maximum of four cascading levels. The RHUB of this code is not configured with power cables. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-75 Carrier configuration principles of the SRAN9.0 RHUB Application Scenario Carrier Configuration Principle of the SRAN9.0 RHUB LTE FDD l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four LTE carriers. l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four independent pRRU groups. Each pRRU group supports a maximum of two LTE carriers. l LTE supports combination of RF signals from cells connected through the RHUB. LTE supports combination of RF signals from a maximum of 16 pRRUs connected to four RHUBs on the same chain. l In LTE mode, a maximum of six RF cells configured on different baseband processing units can form one baseband cell. NOTE LTE does not support combination of baseband signals from RF cells configured on different baseband processing units. UMTS l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four UMTS carriers. l A single RHUB supports a maximum of two independent pRRU groups. Each pRRU group supports a maximum of two UMTS carriers. l UMTS supports combination of RF signals from RF cells connected through the RHUB. UMTS supports combination of RF signals from a maximum of 16 pRRUs connected to four RHUBs on the same chain. l In UMTS mode, a maximum of six RF cells configured on different baseband processing units can form one baseband cell. NOTE A single RHUB that is configured with one pRRU group supports a maximum of two carriers. 4.4.3 Basic pRRU Configurations The following table lists the pRRU configuration principles. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-76 pRRU configuration principles Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD5MP390110 0 pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU4, pRRU3901, UMTS MultiCarriers Remote Radio Unit (Band I: TX2110-2170 MHz/ RX1920-1980 MHz, PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, 1T2R, 1x200 mW) Air interface specifications 96 (Optional) This module is used when a 2.1 GHz frequency band is configured for UMTS. The number of modules depends on site requirements. pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU3, pRRU, LTE Single-mode Remote Radio Unit (Band III: TX1805-1860 MHz/ RX1710-1765 MHz, PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, 2T2R, 2x100 mW, with Installation Kit) Air interface specifications WD6M18RRU L00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 2.1 Gbit/s 1T2R UMTS TX power: 1x200 mW Carrier specifications: RF modules supporting 2.1 GHz frequency band apply to global markets. 2 carriers (UMTS) 96 1.8 Gbit/s 2T2R LTE FDD TX power: 2x100 mW Carrier specifications: 1 carrier (LTE) (Optional) This module is used when a 1.8 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE. The number of modules depends on site requirements. RF modules supporting 55 MHz of the 1.8 GHz frequency band apply to China. LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD6M39PRRU 05 pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU6, pRRU, MultiMode Remote Radio Unit Band I (S1)+Band III (S2) (PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, with Installation Kit), (TX2110 to 2170 MHz/ RX1920 to 1980 MHz, 2T2R, 200 mW), (TX1805 to 1860 MHz/ RX1710 to 1765 MHz, 2T2R, 2x100 mW) Air interface specifications 96 (Optional) This module is used when a 1.8 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE and a 2.1 GHz frequency band is configured for UMTS. The number of modules depends on site requirements. 1.8 GHz: 2T2R LTE FDD 2.1G 1T2R UMTS Transmit power: RF modules supporting 55 MHz of the 1.8 GHz frequency band apply to China. 1.8 GHz: 2x100 mW 2.1 GHz: 1x200 mW l In co-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 48 pRRUs are supported. Carrier specifications: 1 carrier (LTE FDD) l In separate-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 96 pRRUs are supported. 2 carriers (UMTS) LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz. WD6M39PRRU 00 Issue 06 (2014-03-26) pRRU3901, WD6M1PRUa, pRRU, LTE Single-mode Remote Radio Unit (Band III: TX1805-1880 MHz/ RX1710-1785 MHz, PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, 2T2R, 2x100 mW, with Installation Kit) Air interface specifications 96 1.8 GHz: 2T2R LTE FDD TX power: 2x100 mW Carrier specifications: 1 carrier (LTE) (Optional) This module is used when a 1.8 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE. The number of modules depends on site requirements. RF modules supporting 75 MHz of the 1.8 GHz frequency band apply to global markets. LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD6M39PRRU 01 pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU8, pRRU, MultiMode Remote Radio Unit Band I (S1)+Band III (S2) (PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, with Installation Kit), (TX2110 to 2170 MHz/ RX1920 to 1980 MHz, 2T2R, 200 mW), (TX1805 to 1880 MHz/ RX1710 to 1785 MHz, 2T2R, 2x100 mW) Air interface specifications 96 (Optional) This module is used when a 1.8 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE and a 2.1 GHz frequency band is configured for UMTS. The number of modules depends on site requirements. 1.8 GHz: 2T2R LTE FDD 2.1 GHz: 1T2R UMTS Transmit power: 1.8 GHz: 2x100 mW 2.1 GHz: 1x200 mW Carrier specifications: 1 carrier (LTE FDD) 2 carriers (UMTS) LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. RF modules supporting 75 MHz of the 1.8 GHz frequency band apply to global markets. l In co-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 48 pRRUs are supported. l In separate-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 96 pRRUs are supported. 171 Application for pRRU codes has been submitted for the frequency band combination supported by current versions.1 GHz: 1T2R UMTS 2. with Installation Kit). to exchange data with the RHUB.228 Gbit/s rate. 2T2R. l When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in the branch chain (single-link) topology. MultiMode Remote Radio Unit Band I (S1)+Band I (S2) (PoE/12 V DC. l In separate-MPT scenarios. pRRU3901. each supporting a 1.1 GHz: 2T2R LTE FDD Transmit power: 1x200 mW (UMTS) 2x100 mW (LTE) Carrier specifications: 2 carriers (UMTS) 1 carrier (LTE FDD) l In co-MPT scenarios. or 20 MHz. each RHUB supports the following configurations: Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in the single-chain topology. pRRUs cannot be split and must be sold integrally. l Two pRRUs cannot be combined to implement MIMO. 10 MHz. 200 mW). The pRRU configuration principles are as follows: l In newly deployed Lampsite networks. 2T2R.. 15 MHz.25 Gbit/s. The number of modules depends on site requirements.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Model Description Function Maxi mum Quant ity Configuration Principle WD6M39PRRU 02 Function Module. LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz. l The pRRU provides two CPRI ports.1 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE and a 2. pRRU. WD6M1PRU9. 2. l The pRRU and RHUB can be connected in the branch chain (single-link) topology or branch load sharing mode. Ltd. (TX2110 to 2170 MHz/RX1920 to 1980 MHz. 1. a maximum of 48 pRRUs are supported.1 GHz frequency band is configured for UMTS. each RHUB supports a maximum of 8 pRRUs and a single BBU supports a maximum of 96 pRRUs. 172 . 200 mW) Air interface specifications 96 (Optional) This module is used when a 2. (TX2110 to 2170 MHz/RX1920 to 1980 MHz. a maximum of 96 pRRUs are supported. One carrier with a maximum bandwidth of 20 MHz for LO mode – 3. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. each RHUB supports a maximum of 4 pRRUs and a single BBU supports a maximum of 48 pRRUs. 173 . When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in load sharing mode.456 Gbit/s.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference – 1. LTE carrier with a 20 MHz bandwidth (compression mode is 3:1) and a maximum of two UMTS carriers for UL dual-mode mode Connections of the branch chain (single-link) topology l When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in branch load sharing mode..456 Gbit/s. 4. and a maximum of two UMTS carriers for UL dual-mode mode Connections of the branch load sharing mode l The CPRI bandwidth of the pRRU and RHUB is less than or equal to 2.5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion This section describes the typical configuration scenarios and capacity expansion scenarios of 3900 series base stations. LTE carrier. Therefore. each supporting a 20 MHz bandwidth – 2. Two LTE carriers. Two carriers for UO mode – 2. each RHUB supports the following configurations: – 1. it is recommended that services be processed by two pRRUs if the CPRI bandwidth is greater than 2. each supporting a 20 MHz bandwidth (compression mode is 2:1). 1 Typical Configurations This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in various application scenarios.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference 4. Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations Using RFUs Table 4-77 and Table 4-78 list the typical configurations of 3900 series macro base stations in GSM mode and using DRFUs and GRFUs. GSM Mode This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in GSM mode and using RFUs or RRUs. 174 . respectively. Ltd.5. NOTE DRFUs are not configured in a BTS3900AL cabinet.. Table 4-77 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using DRFUs Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Product Config uration S1/1/1 (Witho ut a Combi ner) S2/2/2 (Witho ut a Combi ner) S3/3/3 (With a Combi ner) S4/4/4 (With a Combi ner) S4/4/4 (Witho ut a Combi ner) S6/6/6 (With a Combi ner) S8/8/8 (With a Combi ner) BTS390 0 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS390 0A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS390 0L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DRFU 3 3 5 6 6 9 12 3900 Series DRFU Transcei ver (per TRX) License 0 3 4 6 6 9 12 Antenna 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-78 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using GRFUs Product Configur ation S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S6/6/6 S8/8/8 BTS3900 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900 A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900 L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900 AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 GRFU 3 3 3 3 3 6 3900 Series GRFU Transceiv er (per TRX) 0 3 6 9 15 18 Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations Using RRUs Table 4-79 and Table 4-80 list the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in GSM mode and using RRU3004 and RRU3008 modules.. 175 . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. respectively. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-79 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using RRU3004 modules Product Config uration S1/1/1 (Witho ut a Combi ner) S2/2/2 (Witho ut a Combi ner) S3/3/3 (With a Combi ner) S4/4/4 (With a Combi ner) S4/4/4 (Witho ut a Combi ner) S6/6/6 (With a Combi ner) S8/8/8 (With a Combi ner) Cabinet (optional ) 1 1 1 1 1 l APM 30H (Ver. D): 1 l APM 30H (Ver. B): 2 l APM 30H (Ver. B): 2 l APM 30H (Ver. 176 .. D): 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RRU300 4 3 3 6 6 6 9 12 3900 Series RRU300 4 Transcei ver (per TRX) 0 3 4 6 6 9 12 Antenna 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 Table 4-80 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using RRU3008 modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Product Configur ation S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S6/6/6 S8/8/8 Cabinet (optional) 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 RRU3008 3 3 3 3 3 6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE l In non-MIMO configurations. Table 4-81 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using WRFUs (80 W) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Product Configuration S1/1/1 (NonMIM O) S2/2/2 (NonMIM O) S3/3/3 (NonMIM O) S4/4/4 (NonMIM O) S1/1/1 (MIM O) S2/2/2 (MIM O) S3/3/3 (MIM O) S4/4/4 (MIM O) BTS3900 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. l In actual configurations. 177 . Ltd. Table 4-81 and Table 4-82 list the typical configurations of the base stations using different RFUs. Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations Using RFUs A 3900 series macro base station in UMTS mode can be configured with WRFUs with different power. for example. WRFU (80 W) and WRFUd (2x60 W).3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Product Configur ation S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S6/6/6 S8/8/8 3900 Series RRU3008 Transceiv er (per TRX) 0 3 6 9 15 18 Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 UMTS Mode This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in UMTS mode and using RFUs or RRUs. only one type of baseband board is selected. In MIMO configurations. each carrier provides output power of 20 W. each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W). . 178 . Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Product Configuration S1/1/1 (NonMIM O) S2/2/2 (NonMIM O) S3/3/3 (NonMIM O) S4/4/4 (NonMIM O) S1/1/1 (MIM O) S2/2/2 (MIM O) S3/3/3 (MIM O) S4/4/4 (MIM O) WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Baseb and proces sing board WBB Pd 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4 WBB Pf3/4 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 WRFU (80 W) 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9 Power License (per 20W) 0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18 Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Table 4-82 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using WRFUd (2x60 W) modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Product Config uration S1/1/1 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S3/3/3 (NonMIMO) S4/4/4 (NonMIMO) S1/1/1 (MIMO ) S2/2/2 (MIMO ) S3/3/3 (MIMO ) BTS390 0 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS390 0A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS390 0L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS390 0AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 4-83 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 using RRU3806/RRU3826 modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Product Configuration S1/1/1 (NonMIM O) S2/2/2 (NonMIM O) S3/3/3 (NonMIM O) S4/4/4 (NonMIM O) S1/1/1 (MIM O) S2/2/2 (MIM O) S3/3/3 (MIM O) S4/4/4 (MIM O) Cabinet (optional) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UMPTa1/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Baseb and 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4 WBB Pd Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Product Config uration S1/1/1 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S3/3/3 (NonMIMO) S4/4/4 (NonMIMO) S1/1/1 (MIMO ) S2/2/2 (MIMO ) S3/3/3 (MIMO ) UMPTa 1/ UMPTb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBPf3 /4 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 WRFUd (2x60 W) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 0 3 6 9 3 6 9 Power License (per 20W) 0 3 6 9 3 9 15 Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations Using RRUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in UMTS mode and using RRU3806 or RRU3826 modules. Ltd. 179 .. Table 4-84 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 Baseba nd process ing board WBBP d 1 1 1 1 WBBPf 3/4 1 1 1 1 RRU3806 1 1 1 1 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 0 1 2 3 Power License (per 20W) 0 1 2 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.C) using RRU3806 modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Product Configuration O1 O2 O3 O4 Non-MIMO Non-MIMO Non-MIMO Non-MIMO OMB (Ver. 180 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Product Configuration S1/1/1 (NonMIM O) S2/2/2 (NonMIM O) S3/3/3 (NonMIM O) S4/4/4 (NonMIM O) S1/1/1 (MIM O) S2/2/2 (MIM O) S3/3/3 (MIM O) S4/4/4 (MIM O) proces sing board 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 RRU3806 (80 W) 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9 Power License (per 20W) 0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18 Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 WBB Pf3/4 The following table lists the typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) base station in UMTS mode and using RRU3806 modules. Ltd.. only one type of baseband board or RF module is selected. 181 . Table 4-85 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using LRFUs Product Configuration S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO Issue 06 (2014-03-26) DL 2x2 MIMO S2/2/2 CoFrequency S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidt h DL 2x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO BTS3900 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 LMPT/ UMPTa2/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 1 Baseb and board 1 1 1 3 LBBPc Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Typical Configurations of LTE Base Stations (with RFUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in LTE mode and using LRFUs. l In actual configuration.. NOTE l This table assumes that each channel provides 20 W power. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Product Configuration O1 O2 O3 O4 Non-MIMO Non-MIMO Non-MIMO Non-MIMO Antenna 1 1 1 1 LTE Mode This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in LTE mode and using RFUs or RRUs. 10 MHz to 15 MHz 0 3 0 0 3 Carrier Bandwidth .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Product Configuration S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO LBBPd S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidt h DL 2x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO 2(LBBPd1)/ 1 (LBBPd2) 1 (LBBPd2) 1(UBBPd4) 1(UBBPd5) 1 (UBBPd4) 1 (LBBPd1) 1 (LBBPd1) 1 (UBBPd3) 1(UBBPd3) LRFU 3 3 3 6 6 RF Output Power (per 20 W) 3 3 3 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth . 182 ..5 MHz to 10 MHz 3 3 6 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth .15 MHz to 20 MHz 0 3 0 0 3 Resource Block 150 300 300 150 300 BB Transmit Channel 0 0 0 6 6 BB Receive Channel 0 0 0 6 6 RF Transmit Channel 0 0 0 6 6 RF Receive Channel 0 0 0 6 6 LTE Multi Carrier (per Carrier) 0 0 3 0 0 Antenna 3 3 3 6 6 UBBP d Issue 06 (2014-03-26) DL 2x2 MIMO S2/2/2 CoFrequency 1 (LBBPd3) 2(UBBPd3)/ Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0 MHz to 5 MHz 3 3 6 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth . Ltd. . Ltd.15 MHz to 20 MHz 0 3 0 3 Resource block (required for the LBBPd2) 150 300 150 300 Baseban d board Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 MHz to 10 MHz 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference LTE Base Station Configurations (with RRUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in LTE mode and using the RRU3201. Table 4-86 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using the RRU3201 Product Configuration S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO Cabinet (optional) 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 UMPTa2/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 LBBPc 1 1 1 3 LBBP d 1 1 1 1 UBBP d 1(UBBPd3) 1(UBBPd3) 1(UBBPd4) 1(UBBPd4) RRU3201 3 3 6 6 RF Output Power (per 20 W) 3 3 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth .0 MHz to 5 MHz 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth .10 MHz to 15 MHz 0 3 0 3 Carrier Bandwidth . 183 . Ltd..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Product Configuration S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO BB transmit channel (required for the LBBPd2) 0 0 6 6 Antenna 3 3 6 6 GU Co-Module This section describes the typical configurations when GSM and UMTS are deployed on one SDR modules of a 3900 series base station. 184 . Table 4-87 Typical configurations of a GU separate-MPT base station using MRFUs Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 WCD MA 900 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 BTS39 00 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Typical Configurations of GU Co-module Base Stations Using MRFUs Multimode RFUs can be configured in a 3900 series macro base station in the GU separate-MPT or GU co-MPT scenario. Table 4-87 and Table 4-88 list the typical configurations in these scenarios. NOTE The power of each WCDMA carrier is configured to 20 W. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 BTS39 00AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WMPT / UMPT a1/ UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBP d/ WBBPf 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MRFU/ MRFU e/ MRFU d 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GSM/ UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module 0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 185 .. Ltd. .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module 0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module 0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6 WCD MA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 WCD MA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 186 . Ltd. .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 Power License (per 20W) 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 Antenn a 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Table 4-88 Typical configurations of a GU co-MPT base station using MRFUs Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 WCD MA 900 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 BTS39 00 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UBRIb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBPf 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 187 . Ltd.. 188 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 MRFU/ MRFU e/ MRFU d 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GSM/ UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module 0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module 0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6 WCD MA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 4-89 and Table 4-90 list the typical configurations in these scenarios. RRU3926.. Table 4-89 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 in separate-MPT scenario using RRU3908 modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 WCD MA 900 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. or RRU3928 can be configured in a DBS3900 in the GU separateMPT or GU co-MPT scenario.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 WCD MA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS )(per UMPT) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Antenn a 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Typical Configurations of GU Base Stations Using RRUs An RRU3908. 189 . 190 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 Cabinet (option al) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WMPT / UMPT a1/ UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBP d/ WBBPf 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RRU39 08/ RRU39 29/ RRU39 28 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GSM/ UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module 0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.. Ltd..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module 0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6 WCD MA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 WCD MA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 Antenn a 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 191 . Ltd.. 192 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-90 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 in co-MPT scenario using RRU3929/ RRU3928 modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 WCD MA 900 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 Cabinet (option al) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UBRIb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBPf 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RRU39 29/ RRU39 28 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GSM/ UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module 0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 193 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module 0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6 WCD MA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 WCD MA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 Antenn a 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 The RRU3929 can be configured in a BTS3900C (Ver. 194 ..C) cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBPd/ WBBPf 1 1 1 1 1 RRU3929 1 1 1 1 1 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 1 1 1 1 1 GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module 0 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.C) cabinet in the GU separate-MPT or GU co-MPT scenario. Table 4-91 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver. Ltd. Table 4-91 and Table 4-92 list the typical configurations in these scenarios.C) in separate-MPT scenario using RRU3929 modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz O1 O2 O3 O4 O4 WCDMA 900 MHz O1 O1 O1 O1 O2 OMB (Ver. 195 . Ltd.C) in co-MPT scenario using RRU3929 modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz O1 O2 O3 O4 O4 WCDMA 900 MHz O1 O1 O1 O1 O2 OMB (Ver..C) cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 1 UBRIb 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz O1 O2 O3 O4 O4 GSM Multiple Transceiver for MultiMode Module 0 0 1 2 2 WCDMA 1 Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 1 1 1 1 WCDMA 0 Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 0 1 Power License (per 20W) 0 0 0 0 1 Antenna 1 1 1 1 1 Table 4-92 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver. 196 .. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz O1 O2 O3 O4 O4 WBBPd/ WBBPf 1 1 1 1 1 RRU3929 1 1 1 1 1 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 1 1 1 1 1 GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module 1 1 1 1 1 GSM Multiple Transceiver for MultiMode Module 0 0 1 2 2 WCDMA 1 Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 1 1 1 1 WCDMA 0 Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 0 1 Power License (per 20W) 0 0 0 0 1 MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS) 1 1 1 1 1 Antenna 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE l In UMTS non-MIMO configurations. each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W). In UMTS MIMO configurations. Table 4-93 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using WRFUs (80 W) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 GSM 1800 MHz N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 WCD MA 2100 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 NonMIMO NonMIMO NonMIMO NonMIMO MIMO MIMO MIMO MIMO BTS39 00 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l In actual configurations. 197 . only one type of baseband processing board or RF module is selected. Typical Configurations of a GU Co-BBU Base Station Using RFUs For a 3900 series base station in GU separate-MPT scenario.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GU Co-BBU This section describes the typical configurations when GSM and UMTS are deployed on one BBU of a 3900 series base station.. Ltd. each carrier provides output power of 20 W. Table 4-93 lists the typical configurations when the WRFU (80 W) is used and Table 4-94 lists the typical configurations when the WRFUd (2x60 W) is used. .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 WMPT / UMPT a1/ UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBP d 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4 WRFU (80 W) 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 GRFU (900 MHz) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GRFU (1800 MHz) 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9 RF Output Power (per 20W) 0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18 3900 Series GRFU Transce iver (per TRX) 0 3 6 12 0 3 6 12 Antenn a 6 6 9 9 6 6 9 9 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 198 . Ltd.. 199 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-94 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using WRFUd (2x60 W) modules Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 GSM 1800 MHz N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 N/A N/A S3/3/3 WCDM A 2100 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 NonMIMO NonMIMO NonMIMO NonMIMO MIMO MIMO MIMO BTS390 0 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS390 0A cabinet 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 BTS390 0L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS390 0AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UMPTa 1/ UMPTb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBPf 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 WRFUd (2x60 W) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GRFU (900 MHz) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GRFU (1800 MHz) 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 4-95 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RRUs Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 GSM 1800 MHz N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 WCD MA 2100 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 NonMIMO NonMIMO NonMIMO NonMIMO MIMO MIMO MIMO MIMO Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. 200 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 0 3 6 9 0 3 6 RF Output Power (per 20W) 0 3 6 9 3 9 15 3900 Series GRFU Transcei ver (per TRX) 0 3 6 12 0 3 6 Antenna 6 6 9 9 6 6 9 Typical Configurations of a GU Co-BBU Base Station Using RRUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in the GU co-BBU mode. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 Cabinet (option al) 1 1 APM30 H (Ver.B) :2 APM30 H (Ver.B) :2 APM30 H (Ver. 201 ..B) :2 APM30 H (Ver.D) :1 APM30 H (Ver.B) :2 APM30 H (Ver. Ltd.D) :1 APM30 H (Ver.B) :2 APM30 H (Ver.D) :1 APM30 H (Ver.D) :1 APM30 H (Ver.D) :1 APM30 H (Ver.B) :2 APM30 H (Ver.D) :1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WMPT / UMPT a1/ UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBBP d 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4 RRU38 06 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 RRU30 08 (900 MHz) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 RRU30 08 (1800 MHz) 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9 Power License (per 20W) 0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 202 . NOTE l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power. l The following configurations assume that each GSM carrier provides 20 W transmit power.. Table 4-96 Typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station (with RFUs) GSM 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 LTE 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwi dth 20 MHz Bandwi dth 10 MHz Bandwi dth 20 MHz Bandwi dth 10 MHz Bandwi dth 20 MHz Bandwi dth 10 MHz Bandwi dth 20 MHz Bandwi dth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00 cabinet Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Typical Configurations of GL Co-Module Base Stations (with RFUs) Table 4-96 lists the typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station using RFUs. Ltd. Table 4-97 lists the typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station using RFUs.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 3900 Series RRU30 08 Transce iver (per TRX) 0 3 6 12 0 3 6 12 Antenn a 6 6 9 9 6 6 9 9 GL Co-Module This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and LTE modes co-exist in the RF modules of a 3900 series base station. Ltd.0 MHz to 5 MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 BTS39 00A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UMPT a2/ UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LBBPd 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MRFU d 1800 MHz 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 GSM/ LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 RF Output Power (per 20 W) 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 Carrier Bandwi dth . 203 . 5 MHz to 10 MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwi dth ..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 Carrier Bandwi dth .10 MHz to 15 MHz 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 Carrier Bandwi dth . 204 . Ltd.15 MHz to 20 MHz 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 GSM multipl e transcei ver for the 2nd TRX of multim ode module 0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 GSM multipl e transcei ver for multim ode module 0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6 Resour ce Block 150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 BB Transm it Channe l 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 6 Antenn a 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 Table 4-97 Typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station (with RFUs) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 LTE 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwi dth 20 MHz Bandwi dth 10 MHz Bandwi dth 20 MHz Bandwi dth 10 MHz Bandwi dth 20 MHz Bandwi dth 10 MHz Bandwi dth 20 MHz Bandwi dth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO BTS39 00 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00A cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UBRIb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 205 . 0 MHz to 5 MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwi dth .. Ltd. 206 .5 MHz to 10 MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwi dth .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 LBBPd 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MRFU d 1800 MHz 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 GSM/ LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 RF Output Power (per 20 W) 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 Carrier Bandwi dth .15 MHz to 20 MHz 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.10 MHz to 15 MHz 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 Carrier Bandwi dth . 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 GSM multipl e transcei ver for the 2nd TRX of multim ode module 0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 GSM multipl e transcei ver for multim ode module 0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6 Resour ce Block 150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300 BB Transm it Channe l 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 6 MPT Multi Mode license (LTE) (Per UMPT) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Antenn a 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 Typical configurations of a GL base station using RRUs The RRU3929 can be configured in the BTS3900C (Ver. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 4-98 and Table 4-99. Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 207 .C) that uses the GL separate-MPT or G*L co-MPT mode. Ltd. 10 MHz to 15 MHz 1 1 1 1 Carrier Bandwidth .5 MHz to 10 MHz 1 1 1 1 Carrier Bandwidth .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-98 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.15 MHz to 20 MHz 1 1 1 1 GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module 0 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0 MHz to 5 MHz 1 1 1 1 Carrier Bandwidth . Ltd..C) in separate-MPT mode (with the RRU3929) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 1800 MHz O1 O2 O3 O4 LTE 1800 MHz O1 O1 O1 O1 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 2x2 MIMO 2x2 MIMO 2x2 MIMO 2x2 MIMO OMB (Ver. 208 .C) cabinet 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 UMPTa2 1 1 1 1 LBBPd2 1 1 1 1 RRU3929 1 1 1 1 GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) 1 1 1 1 RF Output Power (per 20 W) 1 1 1 1 Carrier Bandwidth . 0 MHz to 5 MHz 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.C) cabinet 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 UBRIb 1 1 1 1 LBBPd1 1 1 1 1 RRU3929 1 1 1 1 GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) 1 1 1 1 RF Output Power (per 20 W) 1 1 1 1 Carrier Bandwidth .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 1800 MHz O1 O2 O3 O4 GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module 0 0 1 2 Resource Block 100 100 100 100 BB Transmit Channel 0 0 0 0 Antenna 1 1 1 1 Table 4-99 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT mode (with the RRU3929) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 1800 MHz O1 O2 O3 O4 LTE 1800 MHz O1 O1 O1 O1 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 2x2 MIMO 2x2 MIMO 2x2 MIMO 2x2 MIMO OMB (Ver.. 209 . 15 MHz to 20 MHz 1 1 1 1 GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module 0 1 1 1 GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module 0 0 1 2 Resource Block 100 100 100 100 BB Transmit Channel 0 0 0 0 MPT Multi Mode license (LTE) 1 1 1 1 Antenna 1 1 1 1 GL Co-BBU This section describes the typical configurations when GSM and LTE are deployed on one BBU of a 3900 series base station. 210 . Ltd.. Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations Using RFUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a 3900 series macro base station in the GL co-BBU separate-MPT scenario.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 1800 MHz O1 O2 O3 O4 Carrier Bandwidth . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.10 MHz to 15 MHz 1 1 1 1 Carrier Bandwidth . NOTE The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.5 MHz to 10 MHz 1 1 1 1 Carrier Bandwidth . 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-100 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RFUs Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 GSM 1800 MHz N/A NA S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidt h 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidt h 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidt h DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO BTS3900 cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900 A cabinet 1 1 2 2 2 2 BTS3900 L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS3900 AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 LMPT/ UMPTa2/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LBBPc/ LBBPd1 1 1 1 1 1 3 GRFU 900 MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 GRFU 1800 MHz 0 0 3 3 3 3 LRFU 3 3 3 3 6 6 RF Output Power (per 20W) 3 3 3 3 6 6 Carrier Bandwidt h0~5MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.. 211 . .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 Carrier Bandwidt h5~10MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidt h10~15MH z 0 3 0 3 0 3 Carrier Bandwidt h15~20MH z 0 3 0 3 0 3 3900 Series GRFU Transceiv er (per TRX) 0 3 6 12 6 12 Antenna 6 6 9 9 9 9 Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations Using RRUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in the GL co-BBU separateMPT scenario. 212 . Ltd. Table 4-101 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RRUs Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 GSM 1800 MHz N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidt h 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidt h 10 MHz Bandwidt h 20 MHz Bandwidt h DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO DL 4x2 MIMO Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. D): 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 LMPT/ UMPTa2/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LBBPc/ LBBPd1 1 1 1 1 1 3 RRU3008 900 MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 RRU3008 1800 MHz 0 0 3 3 3 3 RRU3201 3 3 3 3 6 6 RF Output Power (per 20W) 3 3 3 3 6 6 Carrier Bandwidt h0~5MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidt h5~10MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidt h10~15MH z 0 3 0 3 0 3 Carrier Bandwidt h15~20MH z 0 3 0 3 0 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.D): 1 APM30H (Ver.D): 1 APM30H (Ver.B): 2 APM30H (Ver. 213 . Ltd..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 Cabinet (optional) 1 1 APM30H (Ver.D): 1 APM30H (Ver.B): 2 APM30H (Ver.B): 2 APM30H (Ver.B): 2 APM30H (Ver. Ltd. 214 .. NOTE l In UMTS non-MIMO configurations. each carrier provides output power of 20 W. and Table 4-104 list the typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode base station using RFUs. and LTE modes. UMTS. each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W). l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power. Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RFUs Table 4-102. Table 4-102 Typical configurations of a GUL separate-MPT base station GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 UMTS 900 MHz S1/1/1 NonMIMO S1/1/1 NonMIMO S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) GSM 1800 MHz N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4 UMTS 2100 MHz S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S3/3/3 (NonMIMO) LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO 1 1 1 1 BTS3900 cabinet Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In UMTS MIMO configurations.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 3900 Series RRU3008 Transceiv er (per TRX) 0 3 6 12 6 12 Antenna 6 6 9 9 9 9 GUL Triple-Mode This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station supporting the GSM. Table 4-103. 215 ..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 BTS3900A cabinet 2 2 2 2 BTS3900L cabinet 1 1 1 1 BTS3900AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 BBU 2 2 2 2 GTMU 1 1 1 1 WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 LMPT/ UMPTa2/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 LBBPc 1 1 1 1 MRFU 900 MHz 3 3 3 3 GRFU 1800 MHz 0 3 3 3 WRFU 2100 MHz 3 3 3 3 LRFU 2600 MHz 3 3 3 3 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module 3 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module 0 0 0 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 Multiple Transceiver (Per TRX) 0 6 9 9 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 3 3 6 9 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 3 3 3 6 RF Output Power (per 20W) 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz 0 0 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz 0 0 3 3 Antenna 9 12 12 12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 216 . Ltd.. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-103 Typical configurations of a base station in GU+L(G)/GL+U(G) mode Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 UMTS 900 MHz S1/1/1 NonMIMO S1/1/1 NonMIMO S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4 LTE 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO UMTS 2100 MHz S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S3/3/3 (NonMIMO) LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO BTS3900 cabinet 1 1 1 1 BTS3900A cabinet 2 2 2 2 BTS3900L cabinet 1 1 1 1 BTS3900AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 BBU 2 2 2 2 GTMU 1 1 1 1 UMPTa1/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 UCIU 1 1 1 1 WBBPf 1 2 2 2 UMPTa2/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 LBBPd2 2 2 2 2 MRFU 900 MHz 3 3 3 3 MRFU 1800 MHz 3 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 217 . 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 WRFU 2100 MHz 3 3 3 3 LRFU 2600 MHz 3 3 3 3 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module 6 6 6 6 GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module 3 3 6 9 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 3 3 6 9 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 3 3 3 6 RF Output Power (per 20W) 3 3 3 3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 218 . Ltd. 219 . Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz 6 6 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz 6 6 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz 0 0 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz 0 0 6 6 Resource Block 300 300 600 600 Antenna 12 12 12 12 Table 4-104 Typical configurations of a base station in G*U*L mode GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 UMTS 900 MHz S1/1/1 NonMIMO S1/1/1 NonMIMO S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4 LTE 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO UMTS 2100 MHz S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S3/3/3 (NonMIMO) LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO 1 1 1 1 BTS3900 cabinet Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 BTS3900A cabinet 2 2 2 2 BTS3900L cabinet 1 1 1 1 BTS3900AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 UBRIb 2 2 2 2 WBBPf 1 2 2 3 LBBPd2 2 2 2 2 MRFU 900 MHz 3 3 3 3 MRFU 1800 MHz 3 3 3 3 WRFU 2100 MHz 3 3 3 3 LRFU 2600 MHz 3 3 3 3 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module 6 6 6 6 GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module 3 3 6 9 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 220 . Ltd.. .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 3 3 6 9 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 3 3 3 6 RF Output Power (per 20W) 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz 6 6 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz 6 6 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz 0 0 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz 0 0 6 6 Resource Block 300 300 600 600 MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS)(per UMPT) 1 1 1 1 MPT Multi Mode license (LTE)(per UMPT) 1 1 1 1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 221 . Ltd. D): 1 APM30H (Ver.. Ltd.C): 2 APM30H (Ver.D): 1 BBU 2 2 2 2 GTMU 1 1 1 1 WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 WBBPd/ WBBPf 1 2 2 3 UMPTa2/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 LBBPc/ LBBPd1 1 1 1 1 Cabinet (optional) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.D): 1 APM30H (Ver. Table 4-106 lists the typical configurations of a base station working in G*U*L mode.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 Antenna 12 12 12 12 Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RRUs Table 4-105 lists the typical configurations of a base station working in GU+L(G) mode and using RRUs.C): 2 APM30H (Ver.C): 2 APM30H (Ver.C): 2 APM30H (Ver.D): 1 APM30H (Ver. 222 . Table 4-105 Typical configurations of a base station in GU+L(G) mode using RRUs GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 UMTS 900 MHz S1/1/1 NonMIMO S1/1/1 NonMIMO S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) GSM 1800 MHz N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4 UMTS 2100 MHz S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S3/3/3 (NonMIMO) LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO APM30H (Ver. 223 .. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 UCIU 1 1 1 1 RRU3908 900 MHz 3 3 3 3 RRU3929 1800 MHz 0 3 3 3 WRRU 2100 MHz 3 3 3 3 LRRU 2600 MHz 3 3 3 3 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module 3 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module 0 0 0 3 Multiple Transceiver (Per TRX) 0 6 9 9 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 3 3 6 9 Multi Carrier License 3 3 3 6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 RF Output Power (per 20W) 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz 0 0 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz 0 0 3 3 Antenna 9 12 12 12 Table 4-106 Typical configurations of a base station in G*U*L mode Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 UMTS 900 MHz S1/1/1 NonMIMO S1/1/1 NonMIMO S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4 LTE 1800 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO UMTS 2100 MHz S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S2/2/2 (NonMIMO) S3/3/3 (NonMIMO) LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 224 . Ltd. Ltd.C): 2 l APM30H (Ver.D): 1 l APM30H (Ver.D): 1 l APM30H (Ver.C): 2 l APM30H (Ver.C): 2 l APM30H (Ver.D): 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 UBRIb 2 2 2 2 WBBPf 1 2 2 3 LBBPd2 2 2 2 2 RRU3929 900 MHz 3 3 3 3 RRU3929 1800 MHz 3 3 3 3 RRU3829 2100 MHz 3 3 3 3 RRU3201 2600 MHz 3 3 3 3 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module 6 6 6 6 GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module 3 3 6 9 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.C): 2 l APM30H (Ver.D): 1 l APM30H (Ver.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 Cabinet (optional) l APM30H (Ver.. 225 . 226 . Ltd..3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 3 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 0 0 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 3 3 6 9 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 3 3 3 6 RF Output Power (per 20W) 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz 6 6 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz 6 6 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz 0 0 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz 0 0 6 6 Resource Block 300 300 600 600 MPT Multi Mode license (LTE) 1 1 1 1 MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS) 1 1 1 1 Antenna 12 12 12 12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 4-107 Typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode base station using RFUs and RRUs LTE 800 MHz Issue 06 (2014-03-26) S1/1/1 N/A S1/1/1 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 UMTS 900 MHz S1/1/1 Non-MIMO S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO) S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO) GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4 UMTS 2100 MHz S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO) S2/2/2 (MIMO) S3/3/3 (MIMO) LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO BTS3900 cabinet 1 1 1 BTS3900A cabinet 2 2 2 BTS3900L cabinet 1 1 1 BTS3900AL cabinet 1 1 1 BBU 2 2 2 GTMU 1 1 1 WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 WBBPd 2 3 4 LMPT/UMPTa2/ UMPTb1 1 1 1 LBBPc 2 1 2 MRFU 900 MHz 3 3 3 GRFU 1800 MHz 3 3 3 WRFU 2100M 3 6 6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 227 .. Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RFUs and RRUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode base station using RFUs and RRUs. . Ltd.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference LTE 800 MHz Issue 06 (2014-03-26) S1/1/1 N/A S1/1/1 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO LRFU 2600 MHz 3 0 0 RRU 2600 MHz 0 3 3 RRU 800 MHz 3 0 3 GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector) 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module 3 3 3 GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module 0 0 3 3900 Series GRFU Transceiver (per TRX) 6 9 9 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 3 3 3 WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier) 0 3 3 Power License (per 20W) 3 6 15 Multi Carrier License (per Carrier) 3 3 6 RF Output Power (per 20W) 6 3 6 Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz 6 3 6 Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz 6 3 6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 228 . .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference LTE 800 MHz S1/1/1 N/A S1/1/1 20 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz 3 3 6 Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz 3 3 6 Antenna 12 12 12 GU Co-BBP This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in GU co-BBP mode. 229 . The following table lists the typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and coBBP and configured with WRFUs of 80 W. Ltd. Table 4-108 Typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and co-BBP and configured with WRFUs of 80 W Issue 06 (2014-03-26) GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 GSM 900 MHz N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 WCD MA 2100 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 NonMIMO NonMIMO NonMIMO NonMIMO MIMO MIMO MIMO MIMO BTS39 00L cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BTS39 00A cabinet 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 BTS39 00 cabinet 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 BTS39 00AL cabinet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UMPT b1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UBBP d1 1 1 1 1- 1 1 1 1- UBBP d2 - - - 1 - - - 1 WRFU of 80 W 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 MRFU 900 MHz 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 MRFU 1800 MHz 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3 MultiCarrier Licens e 0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9 RF Output Power (per 20 W) 0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18 3900 series GRFU transce iver (per TRX) 0 3 6 12 0 3 6 12 (per Carrier ) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 230 . Ltd.. 1 P scenarios.1 P scenarios.D): 1 BBU 1 1 1 1 UMPTa2 1 1 1 1 LBBPd 1 1 1 - - LBBPd 2 - - 1 1 Baseba nd board Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.D): 1 APM30H (Ver.8 P/2.D): 1 APM30H (Ver. 231 .3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference GSM 900 MHz S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 UBBP FirstMode license (GSM) (per UBBP) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UBBP MultiMode license (UMT S (per UBBP) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Antenn a 6 6 9 9 6 6 9 9 Typical Configurations of an AAU3910 in 2. Ltd.8 P/2.8P/2.D): 1 APM30H (Ver. Table 4-109 Typical configurations in 2.6 A+1.6 A+1.6A+1.1 P Scenarios This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.8 P/2..1P scenarios (2T4R 2x40 W) LTE Configuration S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO Cabinet (optional) APM30H (Ver.6 A+1. The following table describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 that is in 2T4R mode and supports 2x40 W output power in 2. The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P scenario.5 MHz to 10 MHz 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth .15 MHz to 20 MHz 0 3 0 3 Resource block (required for the LBBPd2) 0 0 150 300 BB transmit channel (required for the LBBPd2) 0 0 6 6 Antenna 0 0 0 0 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P Scenarios This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P scenario.1 P 3 3 3 3 RF Output Power (per 20 W) 3 3 6 6 Carrier Bandwidth .10 MHz to 15 MHz 0 3 0 3 Carrier Bandwidth . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference LTE Configuration S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO DL 2x2 MIMO AAU3910 2. Ltd..0 MHz to 5 MHz 3 3 3 3 Carrier Bandwidth . 232 .6 A +1.8 P/2. 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference Table 4-110 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P scenario UMT S Confi gurati on S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S4/4/4 S2/2/2 S4/4/4 S2/2/2 S4/4/4 S2/2/2 /2/2/2 S4/4/4 /4/4/4 NonMIM O NonMIM O NonMIM O MIM O MIM O 2T4R 2T4R 20 W/ C 20 W/ C 20 W/ C 2x20 W/C 2x10 W/C 2x20 W/C 2x10 W/C 2T4R 2T4R 2x10 W/C 2x5 W/C BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UMP Tb1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WBB Pf4 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 4 AAU3 902 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Multi Carrie r Licens e 0 3 9 3 9 3 9 9 21 0 3 9 6 9 6 9 9 21 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 (per Carrie r) Power Licens e (per 20W) AAS Virtua l Four Uplin k Chann els (per RU) Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 233 .. 2 Capacity Expansion Principles This section describes the capacity expansion principles for 3900 series base stations. first expand the license. Table 4-111 Capacity expansion principles Expansion Item Principle Radio frequency capacity If the capacity to be expanded does not exceed the hardware capability. and then add RFUs and RRUs. add UTRP boards to provide more transmission ports when.. 234 . Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Transmission capacity If more than four E1s/T1s or more than one FE electrical or optical port is required. NOTE For the typical configurations after capacity expansion. see 4.3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference UMT S Confi gurati on S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S4/4/4 S2/2/2 S4/4/4 S2/2/2 S4/4/4 S2/2/2 /2/2/2 S4/4/4 /4/4/4 NonMIM O NonMIM O NonMIM O MIM O MIM O 2T4R 2T4R 20 W/ C 20 W/ C 20 W/ C 2x20 W/C 2x10 W/C 2x20 W/C 2x10 W/C 2T4R 2T4R 2x10 W/C 2x5 W/C AAS Vertic al Multip le Sector (per RU) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 4. Ltd. The following table lists the capacity expansion principles for 3900 series base stations.5. Baseband capacity If the capacity to be expanded does not exceed the hardware capability.1 Typical Configurations.5. first expand the multi-carrier license and power. and then add baseband boards.